0% found this document useful (0 votes)
122 views287 pages

GS4 User

This document provides instructions for safely operating a Trumpchi vehicle. It emphasizes maintaining proper sitting position and using seat belts for safety. The manual instructs the driver to read it carefully to learn how to use controls and for important safety information, such as hazards that could hurt occupants. It details safety features like airbags and child safety seats. The document also outlines operating systems, equipment, controls, lights and mirrors. Maintaining the vehicle is discussed along with instructions to check safety aspects before maintenance.

Uploaded by

Ignacio
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
122 views287 pages

GS4 User

This document provides instructions for safely operating a Trumpchi vehicle. It emphasizes maintaining proper sitting position and using seat belts for safety. The manual instructs the driver to read it carefully to learn how to use controls and for important safety information, such as hazards that could hurt occupants. It details safety features like airbags and child safety seats. The document also outlines operating systems, equipment, controls, lights and mirrors. Maintaining the vehicle is discussed along with instructions to check safety aspects before maintenance.

Uploaded by

Ignacio
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 287

Foreword

Congratulations on acquiring your Trumpchi car. To enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle, take time to read this manual. In it, you will learn
how to operate GS4 driving controls and convenience items. Proper use of your vehicle can improve driving safety and extend its service life.
The on-board warranty booklet describes the warranty services provided by GAC Motor which you can enjoy, as well as regular maintenance of your
GS4 sedan. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.
Please keep this manual in your car for your reference.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
If you have any suggestions and comments, please call GAC Motor Customer Service Hotline:
Thank you for your support and great kindness to GAC Motor. Wish you a happy driving!

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 1 2016/7/11 16:04:24


Instructions for safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
important. And operating this vehicle safely
is an important responsibility.
• Safety Labels - Affixed to the vehicle.
To help you make informed decisions about
safety, we have provided operating proce- • Safety hints - Words preceded by a safety warning symbol and one of the three signal
dures and other information on labels and in words Warning, Note or Hint.
this manual. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that could hurt you or oth- These signal words mean:
ers.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to Warning Important notes or notes indicating serious casualties.
warn you about all the hazards associated
with operating or maintaining your vehicle.
You must use your own good judgment.

Note Important notes or notes indicating serious damage of car.

Hint You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 2 2016/7/11 17:49:50


Contents

1. Safety Instructions .............................................................. 1 plicable to some models) ...........................................34


1.1 Safe driving .............................................................................1 2.1.3 Indicator lamp ............................................................36
1.1.1 Overview ......................................................................1 2.1.4 Instrument cluster ......................................................43
1.1.2 Maintain a Proper Sitting Position ...............................2 2.1.5 Steering wheel ...........................................................50
1.1.3 Pedal area ...................................................................5 2.2 Keys and Locks .....................................................................56
1.2 Seat belt ..................................................................................7 2.2.1 Ignition key .................................................................56
1.2.1 Overview ......................................................................7 2.2.2 Smart key .....................................................................59
1.2.2 Why Wear Seat Belts ................................................. 11 2.2.3 Central door lock system ...........................................63
1.2.3 Seat belt .....................................................................14 2.2.4 Doors .........................................................................67
1.3 Airbag System .......................................................................19 2.2.5 Trunk lid .....................................................................68
1.3.1 Overview ....................................................................20 2.2.6 Power window ............................................................70
1.3.2 Front seat frontal airbag .............................................23 2.2.7 Power sunroof (applicable to some models) .............72
1.3.3 Side Airbags (Applicable to some models) ................25 2.2.8 Engine compartment cover ........................................76
1.3.4 Side Curtain Airbags (Applicable to some models) ...26 2.2.9 Basic operation of anti-theft .......................................77
1.4 Child Safety ...........................................................................27 2.3 Headlights and Visual Field ...................................................78
1.4.1 Overview ....................................................................27 2.3.1 External lights layout ..................................................78
1.4.2 Child seat ...................................................................28 2.3.2 Light combination switch ............................................80
1.4.3 Installing a Child Seat Properly ..................................29 2.3.3 Interior lighting lamp ..................................................88
2. Operating System and Equipment ................................... 32 2.3.4 Windshield Wipers .....................................................90
2.1 Cab ........................................................................................32 2.3.5 Windshields ...............................................................94
2.1.1 Arrangement of instrument and control mechanism 2.3.6 Rearview mirror .........................................................95
(applicable to some models) ......................................32 2.3.7 View ...........................................................................99
2.1.2 Arrangement of instrument and control mechanism (ap-

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 1 2016/7/11 16:04:25


Contents

2.4 Seats and Interior Convenience Items ................................100 2.6.8 Check before maintenance ......................................153
2.4.1 Importance for adjusting the seat correctly ..............100 2.7 Sound system (MP5 / Navigation)
(applicable to some models) ...............................................155
2.4.2 Headrest ..................................................................101
2.7.1 Basic Operations .....................................................157
2.4.3 Front seats ...............................................................103
2.7.2 Radio .......................................................................160
2.4.4 Rear seat .................................................................106
2.7.3 USB play ..................................................................165
2.4.5 Interior Convenience Items ......................................108
2.7.4 Bluetooth ..................................................................173
2.4.6 Cigarette lighter/Power outlet .................................. 112
2.7.5 Playing an iPod ........................................................181
2.4.7 Trunk ........................................................................ 113
2.7.6 AUX IN playing ........................................................185
2.4.8 Accessories and modifications ................................ 116
2.7.7 HDMI phone interconnection ...................................186
2.5 A/C system .......................................................................... 118
2.7.8 System Settings .......................................................192
2.5.1 Overview .................................................................. 118
2.7.9 USB Playback Precautions ......................................203
2.5.2 Automatic air conditioning system (applicable to some
models) .................................................................... 119 2.7.10 Guide for Common Troubleshooting ........................205
2.5.3 Manual air conditioning system (applicable to some 2.7.11 Features and Specifications ....................................207
models) ....................................................................125
2.8 T-Box (available in some models) .......................................209
2.6 Sound system (radio) (applicable to some models) ............129
2.8.1 Overview ..................................................................209
2.6.1 Basic Operations .....................................................131
2.8.2 Connecting emergency rescue ................................ 211
2.6.2 Radio .......................................................................137
2.8.3 Car owner self-service website ................................212
2.6.3 USB play ..................................................................141
2.8.4 Phone APP ..............................................................215
2.6.4 AUX IN playing ........................................................147
2.8.5 Feature List ..............................................................234
2.6.5 Playing an iPod ........................................................149
3. Driving Directions ........................................................... 235
2.6.6 Precautions ..............................................................150
3.1 Starting and Driving .............................................................237
2.6.7 Features and Specifications ....................................152
3.1.1 Ignition switch ..........................................................237

II

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 2 2016/7/11 16:04:25


Contents

3.1.2 Start the engine .......................................................241 3.6.1 Reversing radar system


(applicable to some models) ....................................279
3.1.3 Shut down the engine. .............................................243
3.6.2 Reversing Rearview System
3.1.4 Driving ......................................................................244 (applicable to some models) ....................................281
3.1.5 Shift Lever Position Indicators .................................253 3.7 Energy-saving device (applicable to some models) ............283
3.1.6 Parking brake ...........................................................254 3.7.1 ECO mode ...............................................................283
3.2 Electronic Brake System for Driving ....................................260 3.8 Electrical power steering system (EPS) ..............................284
3.2.1 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............................260 3.9 Driving technique ................................................................285
3.2.2 Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) ................262 3.9.1 Check of Driving Safety ...........................................285
3.2.3 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (Available in some 3.9.2 Driving during Break-in Period .................................286
models) ....................................................................263
3.9.3 Essentials for Driving under Various Conditions ......288
3.2.4 Traction Control System (TCS) (applicable to some
models) ....................................................................266 3.9.4 Efficient Use of the Vehicle ......................................289
3.2.5 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (applicable to certain 4. Maintenance ..................................................................... 291
models) ....................................................................267
4.1 Maintenance Description .....................................................291
3.2.6 Hill hold control (HHC) (applicable to some models) .268
4.2 Interior Care ........................................................................292
3.2.7 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (applicable to some models)
269 4.3 Exterior Care .......................................................................295
3.3 Intelligent start/stop system (applicable to some models) ...271 4.4 Checking and Adding Fluids ................................................301
3.3.1 Basic service conditions of start-stop system ..........271 4.4.1Checking and Refueling ..............................................302
3.3.2 Turning on/off the start-stop system ........................272 4.4.2 Engine oil .................................................................303
3.4 Cruise Control System (available in some models) ............275 4.4.3 Coolant ....................................................................309
3.5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (applicable to certain 4.4.4 Windshield Washer Fluid and Wiper Blades ............315
models) ...............................................................................277
4.4.5 Brake fluid ................................................................318
3.6 Drive Reversing Assist System
(applicable to some models) ...............................................279 4.4.6 Battery .....................................................................321

III

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 3 2016/7/11 16:04:25


Contents

4.4.7 Wheels .....................................................................324


4.4.8 Anti-theft maintenance description ..........................330
5. Technical Data ................................................................. 331
5.1 Identification Numbers ........................................................331
5.2 Vehicle parameters .............................................................332
6. Accident Handling ........................................................... 341
6.1 Tool Kit and Spare Tire ........................................................341
6.2 Use of warning triangle .......................................................343
6.3 Changing a Flat Tire ............................................................344
6.4. Fuse ....................................................................................348
6.5 Configuration of fuses .........................................................350
6.6 Replace bulbs .....................................................................352
6.7 Emergency start ..................................................................354
6.8 Emergency towing ...............................................................356
7. Type approval information .............................................. 361
7.1 Type approval number ........................................................361
7.2 Type approval information ...................................................362

IV

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 4 2016/7/11 16:04:25


1. Safety Instructions

You should do the following checks and adjust-


1.1 Safe driving
1.

ments every day before you drive your vehicle: Note


- Check and make sure that all car lamps
1.1.1 Overview are under normal working condition. • Do not distract from driving be-
cause of external factors.
- Check fuel volume. • Do not drive your vehicle when your
This section describes important information,
operating essentials, recommendations and - Make sure that tire pressure is under reaction capacity weakens. Medi-
safety precautions for safe driving. For your normal condition. cines, alcohol, drugs and other will
safety and the safety of your passengers, undermine your reaction capacity.
please read carefully and comply with the rel- - Make sure all windows are clean and un- • Follow the traffic laws and speed
evant regulations. obstructed. limits strictly.
- Make sure that no items obstruct the
pedal movement in the footwell.
Warning
- Adjust seats, head restraints and rear
Keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle. view mirrors of driver according to height
Please make sure the manual stays with and body type.
the vehicle if you lend or sell it to the next - Restrain the child in a suitable child seat.
owner. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Check that the child’s seat belt is prop-
erly positioned and secured.
- Fasten your seat belt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seat
belts

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 1 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

1.1.2 Maintain a Proper Sit- Warning


ting Position
Incorrect driving posture can lead to the
Correct sitting posture of the driver following serious consequences:
25cm • If your chest is too close to the
Correct driving posture has a direct influence steering wheel, you cannot get ef-
on driving safety and fatigue. fective protection from airbags, and
can be seriously injured by an inflat-
For your safety and the safety of your passen- ing front airbag.
gers, to reduce the risk of accidental injuries
and deaths, we recommend driver do the fol- • Your hands should always hold
lowing: the steering wheel outside edge (at
Point 9 and Point 3) to ensure you
- Adjust the seat backrest to proper posi- can see all meters and indicators on
OMA28-0047
tion, so that your back can suitably con- the combination instrument.
tact with driver’s seat backrest. • Adjusting the steering wheel until it
- Adjust driver's seat in forward and back- faces your chest can effectively re-
- Adjust driver’s seat headrest, so that the ward direction. Make your leg slightly
central back side of head can just rest on duce the injury caused by an inflat-
bent, and take active operation to ac- ing front airbag.
the center of headrest. celerator pedal, brake pedal and clutch
pedal (for model equipped with manual- • While driving, do not recline the
transmission). seat-back too far. Wear the seat belt
correctly and keep correct sitting
- Adjust steering wheel to ensure that posture to avoid injury caused by
the distance between steering wheel emergency braking.
and your breast should not be less than
25cm.
- Wear seat belts properly (see Page 14).

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 2 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

Correct sitting position of front Correct sitting position of rear seat


seat passenger Warning passengers
For the safety of front seat passengers, to re- Incorrect sitting posture of the front seat For the safety of rear seat passengers, to re-
duce the risk of accidental injuries and deaths, passenger can lead to serious conse- duce the risk of accidental injuries and deaths,
have rear seat passengers do the following: quences: have rear seat passengers do the following:
• If the front seat passenger sits too
- The front seat passenger should move close to the instrument panel, he/ - Adjust the head restraint of rear seat ac-
the seat as far back as possible, leave she cannot get effective protection cording to the height so the center of the
ample space between his/her chest and from airbags. back of the head rests against the center
the instrument panel, so as to get the of the restraint.
most safety protection by an inflating • While driving, do not allow the front
front airbag. seat passenger to put his/her feet - Sit upright and well back in the seat.
on the instrument panel, outside
- Adjust front passenger seat headrest to the window or keel on the seat. But - Keephis/her feet in the foot room in front
make it align with head. always keep his/her feet in the foot of the rear sea and on the floor.
room. Otherwise, he/she can be in- - Wear seat belts properly (see Page 14).
- Adjust the backrest of front passenger jured easily during emergency brak-
seat to make backside fits backrest. ing or in a crash. - Whenever an infant or child rides in your
- Wear the seat belt correctly. • While driving, do not recline the vehicle, take appropriate measures in
seat-back too far. Wear the seat belt accordance with the relevant provisions,
- Keep his/her feet in the foot room in front correctly and keep correct sitting e.g., using a suitable child seat to re-
of the front passenger seat. posture to avoid injury caused by strain the infant or child (see page 28) .
emergency braking.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 3 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

Adjust the head restraints properly.


Warning Warning
Sitting improperly or wearing the seat To reduce the risk of injuries and deaths
belts improperly can increase the chance during a crash, be sure to observe the fol-
of injury during a crash. lowing matters:
• The head restraints must always be
in their mounting positions and be
adjusted properly.
• All the occupants must adjust their
head restraints to their correct posi-
tions according to their own body
types. The top of the restraint must
be even with the top of your head as
far as possible but not lower than
your eyes. The back of your head
OMA28-0001
should rest against the restraint as
far as possible.
- Adjust the head restraint so the center of • While driving, do not adjust the
the back of your head rests against the head restraints.
center of the restraint and adjust the top
of the restraint so it is even with the top
of your head (or as high as possible) .

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 4 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

1.1.3 Pedal area - When the vehicle is running, make sure


all the pedals can be pressed all the way
down to their extreme positions easily.
Pedal for vehicle model with manu- Equipped with pedal of vehicle
- Make sure all the pedals can return eas-
al transmission with 7G-DCT transmission ily.
When a trouble develops in the brake circuit,
the brake pedal needs a larger travel to stop
the vehicle.

Warning
If being obstructed, the pedal is easy to
cause serious accidents and even dam-
age to personnel.
• Do not place anything in the driver’s
3 2 1 2 1 footwell. Otherwise, articles may
slide into pedal area and stop the
driver's operation to the pedal. If
OMA28-0044 OMA28-0128 emergency brake or urgent cases
occur, the driver can't operate brake
1. Accelerator pedal 1. Accelerator pedal pedal and clutch pedal (for model
equipped with manual transmis-
2. Parking brake pedal 2. Parking brake pedal sion), which may cause accidents.
3. Clutch pedal

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 5 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

Wear the Right Shoes Foot pad on the driver’s side


The driver must wear a pair of fit shoes to feel The foot pad should be fixed in the footwell,
the pedal movement sensitively. and cannot interfere with the pedal movement.

Warning
• Make sure the foot pad is fixed in
the footwell securely.
• Do not lay other mat or covering on
the foot pad installed in place. Do-
ing so can shrink the pedal travel,
hindering the pedal movement.
• After cleaning the foot pad removed
from the vehicle, be sure to re-fix it
during re-installation.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 6 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

1.2 Seat belt Warning Note


1.2.1 Overview Not wearing a seat belt or not wearing a For your and others’ safety, be sure to
seat belt properly increases the risk of se- wear seat belts when the vehicle is mov-
rious injury or death in a crash. ing. In the process of using your vehicle,
• When the vehicle is running, be read carefully and comply with all infor-
sure you and your passengers wear mation and WARNINGs in this chapter.
seat belts and wear them properly.
Failure to do so can cause personal
injuries during sudden stop or an
accident.
• Pregnant women and people with
disabilities must wear the seat belts
properly as well.
• When an infant or child rides in your
vehicle, be sure to use the suitable
child seat to restrain the infant or
child according to his/her body
OMA28-0122 type.

Wearing a seat belt properly can effectively re-


duce the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 7 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

Seat Belt System Components Seat belt indicator


Warning
Seat belt system in your car consists of three-
point seat belts and seat belt indicator lamp on When the vehicle is running, always wear-
the instrument (all five seats). ing seat belts and wearing them properly
can greatly reduce the chance of serious
injury or death during emergency braking
or in a crash.

Note
Before starting driving, check the front
seat and make sure there is no heavy on
the seat to prevent the system from giving
OMA28-0002 a false alarm.

Ignition switch or start switch is placed behind


"ON" position. When the driver or front passen-
gers don't wear seat belts, this indicator lamp
will light up, to remind the driver or front pas-
sengers wearing seat belts.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 8 2016/7/11 16:04:26


1. Safety Instructions

Driver's seat belt indicator lamp( ) When the vehicle speed is of or more than 20 Front passenger seat belt indicator
km/h, if you do not fasten your seat belt, the
indicator light will flash about 20 seconds and light ( ) (Applicable to some mod-
The driver's seat belt indicator light is a remind- then stay on, and the beeper also sounds until
er to you to protect yourself by fastening your you do.
els)
seat belt.
The front passenger seat belt indicator light is
When the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h, if a reminder to the front passenger to fasten the
you do not fasten your seat belt, the reminder Note seat belt.
light will flash about 6 seconds and then stay
on. When the seat belt device is failed, the When the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h, if
indicator light will also flash about 20 you do not fasten your seat belt, the reminder
seconds and then stay on, and the beeper light will flash about 6 seconds and then stay
Note also sounds. In this case, go to your au- on.
thorized GAC MOTOR dealer timely to
When the seat belt device is failed, the have your vehicle checked and repaired.
indicator light will also flash about 6 sec- Note
onds and then stay on. In this case, go
to your authorized GAC MOTOR dealer When seat belt device or passenger's
timely to have your vehicle checked and sensor is ineffective, this indicator lamp
repaired. will flash for 6s and light up constantly.
In this case, go to your authorized GAC
MOTOR dealer timely to have your vehicle
checked and repaired.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 9 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

When the vehicle speed is of or more than Seat belt pretensioner device
20km/h, if the front passenger does not fasten
the seat belt, the indicator light will flash about
20 seconds and then stay on, and the beeper
also sounds until the front passenger does.

Note
When the seat belt device or passenger
sensor is failed, the indicator light will
flash about 6 seconds and then stay on,
and the beeper also sounds. In this case,
go to your authorized GAC MOTOR dealer
timely to have your vehicle checked and
repaired.
OMA28-0300

Seat belt pretensioner device


If the occurrence of severe collision reaches
triggering condition,the pretensioner on safety
belt is triggered by electronic control unit, pre-
tensioner drives safety belt ribbon to pull back
and tighten reversely and quickly. In the earlier
stage when a collision happens, it restrains
driver and passengers and makes them stay in
an appropriate sitting posture, preventing the
excessive bending forward of body. In the ear-
lier stage when a collision happens, it restrains
driver and passengers and makes them stay in
an appropriate sitting posture, preventing the
excessive bending forward of body.

10

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 10 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

1.2.2 Why Wear Seat Belts Physical Principles of Frontal Im-


pact
Seat belt can reduce impact injury of the pas-
senger as much as possible by reducing pas- While driving, both the vehicle and the oc-
senger's forward movement inertia when a cupants have energy (kinetic energy) which
front collision of the car occurs. depends on the vehicle speed and the occu-
pants’ mass. The larger the vehicle speed and
the mass, the more the energy upon impact.
In which, the vehicle speed is decisive. For ex-
ample, the released kinetic energy at 50km/h is
5 times that at 25 km/h.

OMA28-0157

During a crash, the occupants not wearing


the seat belts still move forward at the speed
before the crash due to inertia, but the vehicle
dose not. As a result, the occupants can be in-
jured seriously.

11

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 11 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

Consequences arising from not


wearing the seat belts Warning
• Do not get your body under control
by hand. Doing so can increase the
chance of being seriously injured.
• Airbags do not replace your seat
belts. Whether vehicle equipped
with airbag or not, it is sure you and
your passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
• The rear seat passengers must wear
the seat belts properly as well.

OMA28-0131

OMA28-0132
The rear seat passengers must wear the seat
belts properly as well. Otherwise, the passen-
Even if the car is at low speed, the force ex- gers can be thrown forward during a crash. The
erted on human body, when a collision occurs, rear seat passengers not wearing the seat belts
is big, and the passenger can control his own can be injured and endanger other occupants.
body by hands. The unrestrained passengers
will be thrown forward and injuredonce colliding
with other articles in the car.

12

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 12 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

Protection from seat belts


Warning Note
Correct wearing of seat belt can restrain pas-
sengers on proper position and avoid injury, • Make sure seat belts are in place Precautions for using seat belts:
prevent the driver from moving and avoid pas- and positioned properly.
sengers being thrown away. • Do not drive until you and your pas-
• Two people should never use the sengers have worn seat belts prop-
The seat belts can absorb most of the kinetic same seat belt. Never let two chil- erly to reduce the chance of serious
energy resulting from a crash. In addition, the dren use the same seat belt. injuries during a crash.
crush zones and other passive safety systems • While driving, always keep a correct • Be sure to wear the seat belts ac-
can absorb the energy at the same time to re- sitting position and wear a seat belt cording to the relevant instructions
duce the risk of injury further together with the properly. Don't unlock safety belt in this manual.
seat belts. halfway to prevent harm suffered at • Make sure the seat belts are in good
the time of accident. condition.
• Always prevent the seat belts from
being damaged or stuck or rubbing
sharp edges.
• To wear your seat belt properly, try
not to wear loose and bulky clothing
as far as possible (if you have worn
one, take off it.) to ensure the seat
belt to fit your body.
• Keep the seat belt system clean and
in good condition. Never get foreign
matter or liquid into the buckles.
• Never remove, maintain or adjust
the seat belts by yourself.

13

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 13 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

1.2.3 Seat belt Warning


How to wear front seat belt? Wearing rear seat belts • Be sure you and your passengers
wear seat belts and wear them prop-
erly before driving.
• Be sure to insert the latch plate into
its own buckle. Never insert it into
other buckle.

Note
• When pulling out your belt to insert
it into buckle, make sure it remains
parallel to your body. Make sure it is
not twisted.
OMA28-0060 OMA28-0046 • Insert the latch plate into the buckle
and tug on the belt to make sure the
latch is securely locked.
- Adjust the front passenger seat properly - Adjust the head restraint properly (see
(see Page 103). Page 4). • Grasp the upper end of the belt and
quickly pull it out to check whether
- Adjust the head restraint properly (see - Pull out the buckle in the cushion pit slot the belt retractor can lock. Normally,
Page 4). and its underneath seatbelt completely. the retractor can lock quickly.
- Gradually draw the seat belt out at con- - Gradually draw the seat belt out at con-
stant speed, and draw it over your shoul- stant speed, and draw it over your shoul-
der and pelvis. Insert the latch plate into der and pelvis. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a click. the buckle until you hear a click.
- Then, pull the shoulder portion of the - Then, pull the shoulder portion of the
belt upward parallel to your upper body. belt upward parallel to your upper body.
Strain the lap portion of the belt and Strain the lap portion of the belt and
make sure that the latch plate is locked make sure that the latch plate is locked
securely. securely.

14

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 14 2016/7/11 16:04:27


1. Safety Instructions

Unbuckle the seat belt


Warning Warning
The seat belt not fastened properly cannot When the vehicle is running, do not un-
provide good protection during a crash, fasten the seat belt. Doing so can cause
resulting in serious personal injury. serious injury or death during a crash.
• To let the seat belt play a full role,
make sure the seat back is upright
and the occupant sits well back in
the seat and wears the seat belt Note
properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt until
• Make sure to insert the latch plate the vehicle is completely stationary.
into its own buckle.
• To unlatch the belt, unlock the latch
plate and then manually guide the
belt to retract slowly. Prevent the
OMA28-0154 belt from retracting fast. Failure to
do so can cause personal injury by
- When the red PRESS button on the the latch plate.
buckle is pushed, the latch plate pops up
automatically.
- Hold the latch plate and return the seat
belt to allow the retractor to retract the
belt.

15

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 15 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

Adjust the seat belt Adjusting the front seat belt height
Warning
Do not pull out the seat belt and hinder
it from retracting intentionally. The belt
should be tensioned by its retractor freely.

A
A
Note
Only the seat belts positioned properly
can provide the most protection.

OMA28-0003 OMA28-0059

- Make sure the shoulder part of the belt - Press the guide of seat belt in arrow A
rests across the center of your shoulder. direction.
Do not let the belt cross your neck. Make
sure the shoulder part of the belt fits over - Hold the guide part and move it up and
your shoulder. down to adjust the front seat belt to the
desired height.
- Seat belt at waist should be tightly con-
tacted with pelvis. Don’t let the belt press - Release the front seat belt guide.
your stomach. Seat belt must be tied as - After the completion of adjustment, tug
needed. on the belt to make sure the guide is se-
curely locked.

16

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 16 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

A pregnant woman should wear a


Warning properly-positioned seat Warning
• Make sure the shoulder part of the If possible, use the lap/shoulder seat
seat belt rests across the center of belt, remembering to position the lap part
your shoulder. Do not let the seat as low as possible across the hips, not
belt cross your neck. across the stomach to prevent the unborn
• Make sure the seat belt is flat and child from being affected.
fits over your upper body.
• Make sure the lap belt goes across
your hips and pelvic bones, be- Note
comes flat and fits over your hips.
• Make sure to adjust the belt for Unlike the average person, protecting the
snug but comfortable fit. mother is the best way to protect her un-
• While driving, always wear your seat born child. Therefore, a pregnant woman
belt. Do not unfasten your seat belt should wear a properly-positioned seat
at will when the vehicle is running. belt when driving or riding in a vehicle.
OMA28-0004

- Adjust the front seat and its head re-


straint to the desired position.
- Hold the latch plate and pull the shoulder
part of the belt to go across your shoul-
der slowly, and position the lap part of
the belt as low as possible across your
hips, not across your stomach.
- Insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a click.
- Then, pull the shoulder portion of the
belt upward parallel to your upper body.
Strain the lap portion of the belt and
make sure that the latch plate is locked
securely.

17

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 17 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

Maintenance of seat belts - Wrap the belt webbing and retract the
belt when it is dry. Note
During daily use, be sure to check the belts
regularly and maintain them properly to prolong • When the seat belt is not in use,
their service life. Warning unlatch it and let it retract naturally
and straightly.
• If the seat belt is used in a serious • To prolong the belt life, keep the
accident, or badly worn or damaged, belts dry and avoid prolonged expo-
or the pretensioner is activated, re- sure to direct sunlight.
place it.
• Do not modify the belt without per-
mission.

OMA28-0060

- Pull out the seat belt and insert the latch


plate into the buckle, and then check the
belt webbing for damage.
- If the webbing is dirty, wipe its surface
using the towel damped by warm soapy
water. If the dirt is wiped off, wipe it with
the towel damped by clear water.

18

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 18 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

1.3 Airbag System


Depending on the configuration, the SRS sys-
tem consists of the following airbags:
1. Front seat frontal airbag
3 2 1 2. Side Airbags (Applicable to some mod-
els)
3. Side Curtain Airbags (Applicable to some
models)

OMA28-0130

19

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 19 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

1.3.1 Overview Note


Function of airbags
When the car has a serious collision with barri-
To allow the activated airbag system to play a ers, the airbag will quickly open an air pad filled
full role in protection, before starting driving, The airbags do not replace your seat
belts. Fasten constantly the seat belt with with air, to buffer impact force and absorb im-
the driver and passengers should wear the pact energy, and reduce injury degree of pas-
seat belts properly, adjust the driver’s seat and travelling
sengers when passengers fast moves forward
the steering wheel properly, adjust the head due to inertia.
restraints properly and restrain the child in the
vehicle in a suitable child seat. Hint During a severe collision, the airbags will in-
stantly inflate with considerable force. So, to
When the airbags inflate, you may see reduce the possibility of injury, the occupants
Warning what looks like smoke. This is a normal should always sit as far back as practical and
phenomenon. Do not worry about it. sit well back in the seats. The driver and the
Not wearing a seat belt properly or wrong passenger should always sit back as far from
sitting position can cause serious injury the front airbags as practical, so that the air-
or even death during a crash. bags can inflate fully during a crash, thus pro-
tecting the occupants effectively.
• Before starting driving, make sure
you and your passengers wear seat If the car has a sharp collision, passengers
belts properly and sit in correct pos- unfastened seat belt may be thrown away to
ture. airbag inflation area, the inflating airbag may
• While driving, do not let other oc- cause serious injuries and deaths of passen-
cupant (child) , pet or object occupy gers, especially the children.
the space between the front seat
passenger and the front airbag. Do
not let anything cover or attach to
the steering wheel and instrument
panel surfaces.

20

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 20 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

Triggering factor of airbag Repair and disposal of airbag


Warning
Whether the airbags inflate or not depends on Any operation on the airbag system and re-
the crash energy during a crash. If the control moval and installation of the airbag system • Do not repair, adjust or modify any
unit detects that the collision energy is less components for repairing other vehicle parts component of the airbags without
than the ignition requirement of control unit must be carried out by an authorized GAC Mo- authorization.
when a collision occurs, the system won’t start tor dealer. Failure to do so may cause damage
airbag. Therefore, even serious damage of the to the airbag system components. As a result, • Airbags inflate only once. If your air-
car can't indicate that the airbag should be trig- during a crash, the airbags may inflate abnor- bags ever inflate during a crash, the
gered. mally or not inflate. airbags must be replaced by a GAC
Motor dealer.
When scrapping an entire vehicle or its airbag • If the airbag system fails, go to your
Note components, be sure to follow the relevant authorized GAC Motor dealerimme-
safety regulations. Get assistance from a GAC diately to have the system checked.
Motor dealer if your vehicle must be scrapped. Otherwise, the control unit system
During a crash, whether the airbags inflate may not inflate the airbags or inflate
or not depends on the crash energy. This the airbags abnormally during a col-
related factor such as: the accident type, lision.
impact angle, barrier and vehicle speed.

21

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 21 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

Airbag system group The airbag is monitored by electric monitoring


system located in airbag control unit. With the
Airbag system consist of three parts: ignition switch or start switch in Position "ON",
the warning light is lit for several seconds and
• Electric control and monitoring device. goes out after the completion of self-test.
• Airbags with gas generator. The SRS indicator light indicates a fault de-
veloping in the system in one of the following
• Indicator lights in the instrument cluster conditions:
(see Page 38).
1. When the ignition switch and start switch
is turned to Position "ON" , the indicator
light is not lit.
2. With the ignition switch and start switch
in Position "ON", the indicator light is lit
for a few seconds but stays on.
3. When the ignition switch and start switch
and start switch is turned to Position
"ON" , the indicator light is not lit.
4. When the vehicle is running, the indica-
tor light will be illuminated or flash.

22

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 22 2016/7/11 16:04:28


1. Safety Instructions

1.3.2 Front seat frontal air- During a severe frontal collision, the front air-
bags assist the seat belts to provide supple-
bag mental protection to the head and chest of the
driver and front passenger.
During some types of collision, the control unit
system may simultaneously inflate its airbags.

3
4
5
80
100 120
140
Hint
2 6 60 160
TUNE
180 SET
1 L

After the airbag completely inflates, it im-


SE
5 6 SCAN

mediately starts deflating so it won’t inter-


RES

MODE SET

fere with your visibility.


DISP MODE

O
L R

SRS
AIRBAG

OMA28-0055

OMA28-0054
The front seat passenger’s airbag is stored in
the instrument panel (dotted line shaded area),
The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the arrows point to "AIRBAG" that is airbag mark.
steering wheel(line shaded area), arrows point
to "AIRBAG" that is airbag mark.

23

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 23 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

The front airbags may not inflate in one of the


following conditions:
• Ignition switch placed in the "lock"/"ACC"
gear position or start switch placed in the
"OFF" /"ACC" gear position.
• Minor frontal collision
• Side collision.
• Rear collision.
• Rollover.
• Other special conditions.

Hint
"Minor" is based on the feeling of the ve-
hicle controller, regardless of the extent of
damage to the vehicle.

24

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 24 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

1.3.3 Side Airbags (Appli- Side airbag expand rapidly that system trig-
gered in the side of vehicle collision to assist
The side airbags may not inflate in one of the
following conditions:
cable to some models) the seat belts to provide supplemental protec-
• Ignition switch placed in the "lock"/"ACC"
tion to the upper torso of the driver and front
passenger. gear position or start switch placed in the
"OFF" /"ACC" gear position.
During some types of collision, the control unit
system may simultaneously inflate its airbags. • Frontal collision
• Minor side collision.
Hint • Rear collision.
After the airbag completely inflates, it im- • Other special conditions.
mediately starts deflating so it won’t inter-
fere with your visibility.
Hint
"Minor" is based on the feeling of the ve-
hicle controller, regardless of the extent of
OMA28-0097
damage to the vehicle.

Front side airbag is installed at the inner s


driver seat and front passenger seat back fac-
ing the door inside (dotted line shaded area),
arrows point to "AIRBAG" that is airbag mark.

25

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 25 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

1.3.4 Side Curtain Airbags When a car happens severe front collision, ex-
cept the deployment of front row front air bag,
The side airbag with curtain may not inflate in
one of the following conditions:
(Applicable to some the system would also trigger the deployment
• Ignition switch placed in the "lock"/"ACC"
of two side curtain air bags, so as to provide
models) additional protection to drivers and passengers. gear position or start switch placed in the
"OFF" /"ACC" gear position.
Side airbag expand rapidly that system trig-
gered in the side of vehicle collision to assist • Minor side collision.
the seat belts to provide supplemental protec- • Rear collision.
tion to the upper torso of the driver and front
passenger. • Other special conditions.
During some types of collision, the control unit
system may simultaneously inflate its airbags. Hint

Hint "Minor" is based on the feeling of the ve-


hicle controller, regardless of the extent of
damage to the vehicle.
After the airbag completely inflates, it im-
mediately starts deflating so it won’t inter-
fere with your visibility.
OMA28-0129

The side curtain airbags are stored in the ceil-


ing above the side windows.( Shadow part)

26

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 26 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

1.4 Child Safety Warning • Without a child restraint system, do


not let a child with a height below
1.5m use the conventional seat belt
1.4.1 Overview • Never put a rear-facing child seat in in the vehicle. Doing so can cause
the front seat. Placing a rear-facing the child’s stomach or neck to be
Make sure a child below 12 years is properly child seat in the front seat can result injured during emergency braking
restrained in the rear seat. Select a suitable in serious injury or death during a or in a crash.
child restraint system or seat belt according the crash. It's better to let your child sit
on rear seat. • Never let two children use the same
child’s height and weight. child seat.
• Proper wear of a seat belt can let it
To properly route a seat belt through a child play its protective role fully. • Be sure to read and follow the child
seat, follow the seat maker’s instructions. Keep seat manufacturer’s instructions
the child seat instructions together with the • Never hold a baby or child on your and precautions.
vehicle documents in your vehicle so you can lap when riding in a vehicle. Oth-
erwise, the baby or child could be • Follow the relevant laws and regula-
refer to it at any time. tions to install and use a child seat.
seriously hurt or killed.
The national laws and regulations-
• Only a child seat of right size can shall prevail.
provide effective protection to the
child.
• Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Because of big climate dif-
ference from place to place, the in-
vehicle temperature may become
extremely low or high. A child left
alone in a vehicle could be hurt fa-
tally.

27

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 27 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

1.4.2 Child seat


Child Seat Classification (for refer-
ence only) :
a. Baby with weight < 10 kg (reference age b. Child weighing 7 kg ~ 18 kg (reference c. Child weighing 15kg ~ 18 kg (reference
0 ~ 1 year old). age 1~ 4 years old). age 4~ 10 years old).

OMA28-0126 OMA28-0125 OMA28-0127

For restraining an infant under 12 months and For a child below 4-year old, weighing 7 kg ~ For a child below 10-year old, weighing 15 kg ~
10 kg, it is better to use the child restraint seat 18 kg, we recommend you use the 5-belt type 32 kg, we recommend you use the 3-point seat
which can be adjusted to the lie-down position. child seat. belt for the child seat.

28

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 28 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

1.4.3 Installing a Child Seat Generally, child seat has three kinds of fixed
installation: Three-point safety belt fixing, ISO-
Properly FIX system fixing, and LATCH system fixing.
Three-point safety belt fixing utilizes car own
three-point safety belt to tighten and fix child WARNING
Before installing the child seat in the rear seat, as the forgoing description “classification
seat, adjust the front seat to the desired posi- grade of child seat” content diagram; ISOFIX
tion according to the child seat size and the system fixing and LATCH system fixing utilize
child’s body type. This will help keep the child child seat fixing device and in-car separately-
restrained in the rear seat from striking the reserved fixing points for locking and fixing.
interior of the vehicle during a crash or emer-
gency braking. Moreover, this will also prevent
the child from being injured due to the airbags
inflating. Never hold an infant or child on your
lap.
OMA28-0005

The safety labels are on the sun visors. They


warn you of the front airbags’ potential hazards
that could cause serious injury or death. Read
these labels carefully and follow their instruc-
tions.

Warning
Backward child restraint system shall not
be used on the seat protected by front air
bag (under activated state)!

29

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 29 2016/7/11 16:04:29


1. Safety Instructions

XSOFIX system and LATCH system Installing an ISOFIX child seat - Insert the child seat into the ISOFIX up-
per anchor point (-2) of rear seat back-
LATCH system is equiped on the back row The child seats equipped with ISOFIX fixture rest until you hear a click sound.
seats on both sides of the car, therefore, both system can be installed on the seats of the
LATCH system child seat and ISOFIX system vehicle with the appropriate devices in a quick, - Pull both sides of the child restraint to
child seat can be installed. LATCH system is easy and safe manner. Be sure to remove and check whether it is installed securely.
equiped on the back row seats on both sides install the child seats in accordance with the
of the car, therefore, both LATCH system child manufacturer’s Instructions.
seat and ISOFIX system child seat can be in- Warning
stalled.
When the vehicle is running, be sure to
The child seats equipped with ISOFIX fixture restrain the child in the child seat suitable
system or LATCH system type can be installed for the child weight and body type.
on the seats of the vehicle with the appropriate
devices in a quick, easy and safe manner. Be • The ISOFIX fixing device in the vehi-
sure to remove or install the child seats in ac- 2 cle can only be used for the ISOFIX
cordance with the manufacturer’s Instructions. child seat.
The following section mainly introduces the po- • Do not connect the fastening belt,
sition installation instruction of LATCH system object or child seat other than ISO-
child seat. FIX one or any other to the fixing
rings. Doing so may endanger the
1
child’s life.

OMA28-0121

- Lay down rear seat backrest (please re-


fer to P107).
- Put the child seat onto the seat and in-
sert it into the ISOFIX upper anchor point
(-1) in the cushion gap until you hear a
click sound.

30

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 30 2016/7/11 16:04:30


1. Safety Instructions

Hint
• The anchor point (-2) of ISOFIX for
rear seat is hidden in the rear seat-
back.
• The lower fixed point(1)of SOFIX is
hidden between the rear seatback
and cushion.

31

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 31 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.1 Cab
2.1.1 Arrangement of instrument and control mechanism (applicable to some models)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

9
8 3
4

60
80
100 120

19
7
RES

20
SET

DISP

MODE

6
VOL TUNE
AM/FM NAVI

SEL
MODE MENU SET

SRS
AIRBAG

5
O

21
L R

2
1 MODE
OFF TEMP
0
AUTO

A/C TEMP

4 22
23
3 R
p

24
2 25
26
1

OMA28-0185

32

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 32 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

1. EPB panel (applicable to some models) 6. Airbag floating horn switch - Windshield wiper position switch
- Electronic parking brake switch 7. Driver front airbag - Rear windshield washer knob
- Automatic parking switch 8. Driver's door latch and interior door 15. Multimedia Display Screen
handle
2. Accelerator pedal, brake pedal (appli- 16. Multimedia control panel
cable to some models) 9. Lighting control lever
- Multimedia control knob and button
3. Fuel tank cap and engine hood handle - Position lights, High/low beams
- Seat heating switch (applicable to some
4. Electric window control panel - Front foglight and rear foglight models)
- Central locking button - Turn signal lamp 17. A/C control panel
- Electric window safety switch 10. Steering wheel button (left) 18. Front passenger frontal airbag
- Driver's side and passenger side window - MULTIMEDIA CONTROL button (appli- 19. Air-conditioning Outlet and Adjusting
buttons cable to some models) Knob
5. Left side combination switch panel - Mute key (applicable to some models) 20. Front passenger side door lock latch and
inner handle of door
- Headlamp cleaning switch (applicable to - Bluetooth control button (applicable to
some models) some models) 21. Glove box handle
- Switch, exterior rearview mirror regulator 11. Combination instrument 22. Front passenger side electric door and
window switch
- Electronic stability program (ESP) switch 12. Steering wheel button (right)
(applicable to some models) 23. Storage box, which includes the follow-
- Combination instrument display control ing devices:
- Headlamp follow-up function switch (ap- button (applicable to some models)
plicable to some models) - AUX jack, USB jack
- Cruise control button (applicable to some
- Hill descent assist system (available in models) - Cigar lighter
some models)
13. PEPS switch (applicable to some mod- 24. Shift lever for transmission
els) 25. Driving-mode-switch button (applicable
14. Wiper control lever to some models)
26. Middle handle of front seat

33

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 33 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.1.2 Arrangement of instrument and control mechanism (applicable to some models)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

9
8 3
4

60
80
100 120

19
7
RES

20
SET

DISP

MODE

6
VOL TUNE
AM/FM NAVI

SEL
MODE MENU SET

SRS
AIRBAG

5
O

21
L R

2
1 MODE
OFF TEMP
0
AUTO

A/C TEMP

4 1

2
3

4
5

22
23
3 24
2
1 25

OMA28-0107

34

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 34 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

1. Accelerator pedal, brake pedal, clutch 9. Lighting control lever 15. Multimedia Display Screen
pedal (applicable to some models)
- Position lights, High/low beams 16. Multimedia control panel
2. Parking brake lever (applicable to some
models) - Front foglight and rear foglight - Multimedia control knob and button

3. Fuel tank cap and engine hood handle - Turn signal lamp 17. A/C control panel

4. Electric window control panel 10. Steering wheel button (left) 18. Front passenger frontal airbag

- Central locking button - MULTIMEDIA CONTROL button (appli- 19. Air-conditioning Outlet and Adjusting
cable to some models) Knob
- Electric window safety switch
- Mute key (applicable to some models) 20. Front passenger side door lock latch and
- Driver's side and passenger side window inner handle of door
buttons - Bluetooth control button (applicable to
some models) 21. Glove box handle
5. Left side combination switch panel
11. Combination instrument 22. Front passenger side electric door and
- Manual adjustment knob of headlamp window switch
height (applicable to some models) 12. Steering wheel button (right)
23. Storage box, which includes the follow-
- Switch, exterior rearview mirror regulator - Combination instrument display control ing devices:
button (applicable to some models)
- Start stop system switch (available in - AUX jack, USB jack
some models) - B-CALL button (applicable to some mod-
els) - Cigar lighter
- Electronic stability program (ESP) switch
(applicable to some models) - Cruise control button (applicable to some 24. Shift lever for transmission
models)
6. Airbag floating horn switch 25. Middle handle of front seat
13. Ignition switch (applicable to some mod-
7. Driver front airbag els)
8. Driver's door latch and interior door 14. Wiper control lever
handle
- Windshield wiper position switch
- Rear windshield washer knob

35

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 35 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.1.3 Indicator lamp


Indicator light for broken code screen of instrument cluster (applicable to
some models)
The left figure shows the instrument cluster
with broken-code display screen. Its inside indi-
cator and warning lights are described below.
1 2 3

4 100 120
3 5 80 140
2 6 60 160
40 180
1 7
20 200
1000 km/h
r/min
8 220

OMA28-0168

36

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 36 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

Indicator light for monochrome TFT instrument cluster (applicable to


some models)
The left figure shows the instrument cluster
with Monochrome TFT display screen. Its in-
side indicator and warning lights are described
below.
1 2 3

4 100 120
3 5 Driving speed 80 140
2 6 60 160
40 180
1 7
20 200
1000 km/h
r/min
8 220

OMA28-0169

37

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 37 2016/7/11 16:04:30


2. Operating System and Equipment

1. Indicator and warning lights in the engine : High coolant temperature indicator light : Emissions MIL (yellow)
tachometer
(red)
- With the ignition switch and start switch
: SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates in Position ON, if the engine is not start-
indicator light (red) the engine coolant temperature is high. ed, the indicator light is lit.
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates - After the engine starting, if the indicator
there is a trouble in the airbag system. light is lit, this indicates there is a trouble
: Low fuel indicator light (yellow) in the exhaust system.

- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates


: Low oil pressure warning light (red) less fuel remains in the tank.
: Engine MIL (yellow)
- With the ignition switch and start switch
in Position ON, if the engine is not start- - (for vehicle without start/stop system)
ed, the warning light is lit. : High-beam indicator lamp (blue) when ignition switch or start switch is at
“ON” position, but the engine does not
- After the engine starting, if the warning - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates start, the indicator is lit during the course
light is lit, this indicates the engine oil high beams are turned on. of self-inspection; (for vehicle with start/
pressure is low. stop system) ignition switch and start
switch is at “ON”, but the engine does
not start, the indicator will go out in 3
: Charging system warning light (red) seconds after self-inspection is displayed
at the time of power on.
- With the ignition switch and start switch - After the engine starting, if the indicator
in Position ON, if the engine is not start- light is lit, this indicates there is a trouble
ed, the warning light is lit. in the engine system.
- After the engine starting, if the warning
light is lit, this indicates there is a trouble
in the charging system.

38

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 38 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

: Start-stop fault working indicator light : MIL for start-stop system (white, yellow)
(green) (applicable to some models)
- When the start and stop conditions are
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates not met, the indicator light will come on
the start-stop system is activated. and remain in white .
- If the indicator light becomes yellow, this
indicates there is a trouble in the start-
: Front fog light indicator (green) stop system.
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
the front fog light is turned on.
: Cruise control indicator light (white,
green) (applicable to some models)
: Rear fog light indicator (yellow) - If the indicator light is lit (white), this indi-
cates the cruise control gets ready.
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
the rear fog light is turned on. - If green, this indicates the cruise control
is enabled.

: Lighting indicator lamp (green)


- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
the position lights, dashboard lights, li-
cense plate lights and ambient lights are
turned on.

- ECO mode indicator light (green) (appli-


cable to some models)
- If the reminder light is lit, this indicates
ECO mode is activated.

39

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 39 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

2. Indicator and warning lights in the middle : Driver's seat belt warning light (red) : Front passenger seat belt indicator light
of the instrument
(Red) (Applicable to some models)
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
: Left turn signals and hazard warning the driver's belt is not fastened or there - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
lights (green) is a trouble in the belt system. the front passenger seat belt is not fas-
: Right turn signals and hazard warning tened or there is a trouble in the belt sys-
tem.
lights (green)
: Indicator light for parking brake and
- When left or right turn signal indicator brake system (red)
light flashes alone, this indicates that the : TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system)
left or right turn signals are turned on. - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
the parking brake is set, the brake fluid indicator light (yellow) (applicable to
- When the hazard warning light switch level is low or there is a trouble in the some models)
is pressed, the two turn signal indicator brake-force distribution (EBD) system.
lights will flash together with all the out- - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
side turn signal lights. there is a trouble in the tire pressure sys-
tem.
: Electronic park brake (EPB) state indi-
cator (red, green) (applicable to some
: Door-open indicator light (red) models) TRA: Transportation mode indicator light
(green) (applicable to some models)
- If the indicator light is lit (red), this indi-
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates cates the EPB is applied. - The indicator is lit, which means trans-
the door on the corresponding side, en- portation mode is opened.
gine hood or trunk lid is not closed. - The indicator is lit (green), which means
that automatic parking starts.
- If any door is not closed, when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds 20 km/h, the buzzer - If the indicator light (red) flashes, this
of the instrument will sound to alert the indicates the EPB is engaged partly or
driver of that. fails.

40

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 40 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

3. Indicator and warning lights in speedom- : EPB MIL (yellow) (applicable to some : Electric power steering system (EPS)
eter fault indicator (yellow)
models)
: ESP OFF indicator light (yellow) - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates - When this indicator comes on, it indi-
there is a trouble in the EPB system. cates there is a problem with the EPS
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates system.
there is a trouble in the ESP system or - If the indicator light flashes, this indicates
HHC system. the EPB is in maintenance mode.
- When the indicator light flashes, it indi- : Hill descent control (HDC) indicator (yel-
cates the ESP is working. low)(applicable to some models)
: Immobilizer system indicator light (red)
- If hill descent control mode indicator
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates lamp lights up, it indicates that the hill
: ABS (Anti-lock braking system) indicator the engine immobilizer system or the ve- descent control is switched on.
light (yellow) hicle anti-theft system is enabled.
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
there is a trouble in the ABS system.
: ESP OFF indicator light (yellow)

: Transmission MIL (yellow) (applicable to - If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
the ESP system is turned off.
some models)
- If the indicator light is lit, this indicates
there is a trouble in the automatic trans-
mission (AT).
- If the indicator light flashes, this indicates
the AT oil temperature is high.

41

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 41 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

: Transportation mode indicator light


(green) (applicable to some models)
- When sport pattern is opened, this indi-
cator is lit; when it is closed, the indicator
goes out.

: Adaptive system turnoff indicator lamp


(applicable to some models)
- The indicator is lit, which means the
headlamp intelligent follow-up system is
closed.

42

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 42 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.1.4 Instrument cluster


1. Engine tachometer
2. Cluster display
– Including information (some information
1 2 3 is only applicable to specific vehicles):
engine coolant temperature gauge, fuel
gauge, driving information, door opening
indicator, gear display and odometer etc.
3. Speedometer
4. Adjusting rod
4 100 120
3 5 80 140
2 6 60 160
40 180
1 7
20 200
1000 km/h
r/min
8 220

OMA28-0170

43

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 43 2016/7/11 16:04:31


2. Operating System and Equipment

Engine tachometer Cluster display


Note
Broken code screen (applicable to some mod-
• The red warning area(0 r/min ~ 7000 els)
r/min) on the speed dial means the
4 heavy-duty area of the vehicle. Do
3 5
not let the vehicle operate in this
2 6 area. Doing so can cause fuel cut-
off due to engine self-protection.
1 7 • Driving the vehicle which has not
been run in properly to the area of
red font can cause the engine wear
1000

6
r/min
8
easily. 6
• The engine can be severely dam- 40
aged if the tachometer stays on the
red zone. 7
OMA28-0171
20
The engine tachometer is used to indicate the 8
current engine speed, in x1000r/min, minimum Hint OMA28-0173

scale 500r/min, ranging from 0 r/min to 8000 r/


min. Shifting into a higher gear timely helps 1. : Engine coolant
save fuel and reduce the engine running temperature gauge (i.e., water tempera-
noise. ture gauge), for indicating the current
engine coolant temperature.
- There is a total of eight sections, indicat-
ing the range of C ~ H, in which, the left
side represents low temperature and the
right side indicates high temperature. An
appropriate number of sections is illu-
minated depending on the temperature.
The un-illuminated sections are black.
- When engine coolant temperature is
greater than 50℃ , temperature gauge is
lit from the first case.

44

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 44 2016/7/11 16:04:32


2. Operating System and Equipment

- After the engine starts and works for 3. Travel information display
some time, the needle should point the Warning
4~5 major sections. a. : Driving time
- When all 1-8 red sections are lit, this Open the hood, and read and comply with
indicates the current engine coolant tem- the relevant warning notices for the en-
gine compartment before operation(see b. : Outdoor temperature
perature is too high. Then, the coolant
temperature indicator light in the com- page 76). (applicable to some models)
bination instrument is lit and the buzzer
alarms to alert the driver. At this moment, 2. : Fuel gauge, to in- c. : Instantaneous fuel
stop the car and turn off the engine. dicate the current fuel remaining in the
tank. consumption
Inspect coolant level (please refer to
page 312) . - There is a total of eight sections, indicat- d. : Average fuel con-
ing the range of E ~ F, in which, the left
side represents the fuel tank is empty, sumption
Note and the right side represents the fuel
tank is full. An appropriate number of e. : Average speed
• If the engine coolant temperature is sections is illuminated depending on the
high, do not continue driving even residual fuel. The un-illuminated sections
if the coolant level is normal, unless are black. f. : Driving mileage
the temperature reaches the nor-
mal range. If the temperature stays - When the red minor section of the first
section is lit only or no section is lit, this g. : Battery voltage
high, go to your GAC MOTOR dealer
for inspection and maintenance as indicates that the fuel in the tank is less
soon as possible. than 8L, and the low fuel-level indicator - Briefly press (less than 3S) DISP to
light of the combination instrument is lit switch driving information; press and
• If additional part is installed at air to remind the driver of shortage of fuel. hold (more than 3S) DISP to clear a, d, e.
inlet, it may reduce cooling effect of Be sure to refuel as soon as possible.
coolant. The engine overheats eas-
ily at high ambient temperature and
when the engine running under high
load.

45

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 45 2016/7/11 16:04:32


2. Operating System and Equipment

6. : Odometer, for indicating


h. : Tire pressure (appli- 4. : Door open indicator light (see
the number of kilometers the vehicle has
Page 40). driven so far, including the total distance
cable to some models) and Trip A and Trip B.
5. : Gear position display, used for - : Total mileage
i. : Tire temperature indicating the current gear position. • Display Range 0 km~999999 km.
- For MT vehicle type, if there is no gear - / : Trip A /Trip B.
(applicable to some models) shifting reminding, it does not display
here. • Range from 0 km to 999.9 km.
- Tire pressure and tire temperature dis- When a trip exceeds 999.9 km, it
play are related to vehicle configuration. - For MT vehicle type, if there is gear shift- will be reset and then continue ac-
If there is no tire pressure configuration, ing reminding, it displays 1st, 2nd, 3rd, cumulating.
it does not display. 4th and 5th gear according to receiving
signals or displays upshifting reminding • Only display one between short
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th gear or down- mileage A and short mileage B at
shifting reminding 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and the same time, It was switched be-
5th gear. tween display and clear by adjust-
ing lever (Please refer to page
- For G-DCT vehicle type, it displays P, R, 49)
N, D, D1~D7, S, S1~S7, M1~M7 gears
according to receiving signals.

46

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 46 2016/7/11 16:04:32


2. Operating System and Equipment

Monochrome TFT screen (applicable to some - After the engine starts and works for
models) some time, the needle should point the Warning
2~3 major sections.
- When all 1-8 red sections are lit, this Open the hood, and read and comply with
indicates the current engine coolant tem- the relevant warning notices for the en-
perature is too high. Then, the coolant gine compartment before operation (see
temperature indicator light in the com- page 76).
Driving speed bination instrument is lit and the buzzer
alarms to alert the driver. At this moment, 2. : Fuel gauge, to
6 6 stop the car and turn off the engine. indicate the current fuel remaining in the
Inspect coolant level (please refer to tank.
page 312).
40 - There is a total of four major sections
(each major section is subdivided into
7 eight minor sections), indicating the
20 Note
range of E ~ F, in which, the left side rep-
resents the fuel tank is empty, and the
8 OMA28-0172 • If the engine coolant temperature is right side represents the fuel tank is full.
high, do not continue driving even An appropriate number of sections is illu-
if the coolant level is normal, unless minated depending on the residual fuel.
1. : Engine coolant the temperature reaches the nor- The un-illuminated sections are black.
temperature gauge (i.e., water tempera- mal range. If the temperature stays
ture gauge), for indicating the current high, go to your GAC MOTOR dealer - When the red minor section of the first
engine coolant temperature. for inspection and maintenance as section is lit only or no section is lit, this
soon as possible. indicates that the fuel in the tank is less
- There is a total of four major sections than 8L, and the low fuel-level indicator
(each major section is subdivided into • If additional part is installed at air
inlet, it may reduce cooling effect of light of the combination instrument is lit
eight minor sections), indicating the to remind the driver of shortage of fuel.
range of C ~ H, in which, the left side coolant. The engine overheats eas-
ily at high ambient temperature and Be sure to refuel as soon as possible.
represents low temperature and the
right side indicates high temperature. An when the engine running under high
appropriate number of sections is illu- load.
minated depending on the temperature.
The un-illuminated sections are black.
- When engine coolant temperature is
greater than 50℃ , temperature gauge is
lit from the first case.

47

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 47 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

3. Middle driving information change dis- - Display depends on the outdoor temper- Speedometer
play: continuous distance, instantaneous ature signal sent by the air conditioning
fuel consumption, average fuel con- system, in ℃ / ℉ .
sumption, average speed, driving time,
after starting, tire pressure (applicable to - When the outdoor temperature informa-
some models), tire temperature (appli- tion is not received, display "-: -."
100 120
cable to some models), outside tempera- 80 140
ture (applicable to some models), battery 6. . Trip A/Trip B
60 160
voltage etc., for details, (please refer to
P52). • Range from 0 km to 999.9 km. When a 40 180
trip exceeds 999.9 km, it will be reset
4. D2: gear display, for indicating the cur- and then continue accumulating. 20 200
rent gear position. km/h
220
- Long press adjusting rod to clear short
- For MT vehicle type, if there is no gear trip A, short trip B (Trip A/Trip B), (please
shifting reminding, it does not display refer to P49).
here.
7. : Odometer OMA28-0174
- For MT vehicle type, if there is gear shift-
ing reminding, it displays 1st, 2nd, 3rd, - Display Range 0km ~ 999999 km.
4th and 5th gear according to receiving Speedometer is used for indicating the current
Speedometer vehicle speed, in km/h, minimum scale of 10
signals or displays upshifting reminding
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th gear or down- km/h, ranging from 0 km / h to 220 km / h.
shifting reminding 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and
5th gear.
Note
- For G-DCT vehicle type, it displays P, R,
N, D, D1~D7, S, S1~S7, M1~M7 gears • 200 km/h ~ 220 km/h represents the
according to receiving signals. heavy-load range. To protect your
5. 00 °C: outdoor temperature (normally vehicle, avoid prolonged driving in
displayed, can not be switched) this range.
• Strictly abide by traffic rules. Do not
overspeed.

48

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 48 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

Adjusting lever Trip switching Backlight adjustment


- With the ignition switch in Position ON,
clicking on the adjusting lever switches
between Trip A and Trip B. In either Trip Backlight
A or Trip B, pressing the adjusting lever
100 120 resets the current trip (applicable to
80 140 some models).
60 160 _
When ignition switch or start switch is at “ON” +
40 180 position, press and hold adjusting rod to clear Please open the small light, and set the
brightness.

20 200
short distance.
Back
km/h
220
00:00 D2 00 c
Trip km
00:00 00000
OMA28-0187
OMA28-0175

When ignition switch or start switch is at “ON”


You can turn left, turn right, click on ( < 3s) or position, turn on position lamp, turn to the left
press (>3s) the adjusting lever to switch the trip and the backlight luminance reduces; turn to
and adjust the interior backlight. the right and backlight luminance increases.
- Select "RETURN" to return to the previ-
ous menu.

49

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 49 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.1.5 Steering wheel Warning


Adjust steering wheel position • After adjusting the steering wheel,
push the lever all the way on to lock
You can adjust the steering wheel height to suit the steering wheel and prevent it
your preference before you start driving. from displacing automatically when
the vehicle is moving.
• To avoid traffic accidents, the steer-
ing wheel can be adjusted only
when the car is in parking condition.
• Do not let the steering wheel point
25cm toward your face. Otherwise, you
cannot get effective protection from
OMA28-0143
your front airbag during a crash.
After adjusting, make sure the steer-
- And then push lock handle down in re- ing wheel points toward your chest.
verse direction of arrow A, to lock steer-
ing wheel.
- Move the steering wheel to the desired
OMA28-0047 position, so it points toward your chest.
Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
- Adjust the seat so your are a comfort-
able distance from the pedals. - And then push lock handle up in reverse
direction of arrow A, to lock it.
- Try to move the steering wheel in up,
down, front and rear directions, to
confirm whether the steering wheel is
locked.

50

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 50 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

Steering wheel button (left) 3. Bluetooth control button (applicable to Steering wheel button (right)
some models)

- Answer Call button

• To answer a call, press the button.


- : Hanging up button
RES+
• To refuse a call, press the button.
During conversation, press the
MOOE
button to end the call. SET-

DISP

OMA28-0063 OMA28-0064

1. Multimedia control button (applicable to 1. Combination instrument display screen


some models) DISP control key.
- MODE: button for mode. Change FM1, - Short press DISP button, information
FM2, FM3, AM1, AM2 or USB play mode change display: continuous distance,
(USB has been inserted). instantaneous fuel consumption, aver-
age fuel consumption, average speed,
- /: Backward/Forward. Change radio driving time, after starting, tire pressure
stations in radio mode. (applicable to some models), tire tem-
- / : VOL + / VOL-. perature (applicable to some models),
outside temperature (applicable to some
2. : Mute button models), battery voltage etc.
- Press and hold (more than 3 seconds)
- To mute, press it, and to unmute, press it DISP to clear driving information, such
again. as “average fuel consumption, average
speed and driving time”.

51

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 51 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

2. : B-CALL button (applicable to some Driving information description Driving mileage


models) In driving information interface, briefly press
- Pressing briefly enters the Bluetooth and DISP key to change different driving informa-
connection service center functions (see tion. This information helps you to know vehicle
Page 209). conditions. Travel information: Endurance Mileage

3. Cruise control button (applicable to some - Driving mileage


models) - Instantaneous fuel consumption
- RES + : Resume cruise / acceleration - Average fuel consumption
button
km
- Average speed
- SET - : Setting cruise /Deceleration but-
ton 31.5
- Driving time P
6.5 266
- : Start Cruise button - After started (information included: aver-
age fuel consumption, driving distance, OMA28-0216

- : Cancel Cruise button average speed and driving time)


- Tire pressure (applicable to some mod- It displays continuous distance by fuel in fuel
els) tank. When excessive fuel is a little, it will dis-
play continuous distance is “low”.
- Tire temperature (applicable to some
models)
- Outdoor temperature (applicable to some
models)
- Battery voltage
After Start refers to driving information in single
driving after the vehicle starts. The vehicle pa-
rameters cannot be reset.

52

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 52 2016/7/11 16:04:33


2. Operating System and Equipment

Instantaneous fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Average speed

Instant fuel consumption Average consumption Average speed

. 6.8 68
L/100km L/100km km/h

31.5 31.5 31.5


P P P
6.5 266 6.5 5266 6.5 266
OMA28-0217 OMA28-0218 OMA28-0219

It displays instantaneous fuel consumption. It displays average fuel consumption after zero It displays average driving speed after zero
clearing last time. In this interface, press and clearing last time. In this interface, press and
hold DISP key to clear. hold DISP key to clear.

53

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 53 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

Driving time After starting Tire pressure (applicable to some models)

Driving time After start Tire pressure

00 :58 7.2 L/100km 12 km 230 230

67 km/h 00 58 h 230 240

31.5 31.5 31.5


P P P
6.5 266 6.5 266 6.5 266
OMA28-0220 OMA28-0221 OMA28-0222

It displays driving time after zero clearing last It displays driving information in single driving It displays corresponding tire pressure of four
time. In this interface, press and hold DISP key after the vehicle starts, including average fuel wheels.
to clear. consumption (unit: L/100km), driving distance
(unit: km), average speed (unit: km/h), and
driving time (unit: h).
The information cannot be reset. After the en-
gine flames out, the data on the interface are
cleared automatically. But data on other inter-
faces cannot be affected.

54

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 54 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

Tire temperature (applicable to some models) Outdoor temperature (applicable to some mod- Battery voltage
els)

Tire temperature Battery voltage


Outside temperature

35 37
12.3
36 35
31.5
V

31.5 31.5
P 31.5
P
6.5 266 P 6.5 266
6.5 266
OMA28-0223 OMA28-0225
OMA28-0224

It displays corresponding tire temperature of It displays the voltage level of the battery in the
four wheels. It displays ambient temperature outside the ve- engine hood.
hicle.

55

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 55 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2 Keys and Locks Key with PEPS

2.2.1 Ignition key


A
Two keys and key bar code are equipped
with car; according to different configurations,
some car types are equipped with one remote
key and one spare key, some car types are
equipped with two same remote keys. If you B
need to customize the spare key, inform the
key barcode to your dealer. If the key barcode
is lost, inform the VIN code to your dealer.

OMA28-0006 OMA28-0007

You can use the smart key to start the engine, Move the switch in the direction of Arrow A and
lock or unlock all the doors and open the trunk pull out the mechanical key in the direction of
through wireless remote control. Arrow B.

56

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 56 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

Key with conventional ignition


Hint
switch function
The mechanical key can be used in case
of emergency. For example, if the remote
transmitter fails, you can use the mechan-
ical key to unlock the driver’s door.

OMA28-0048

Mechanical key can lock all the doors and


unlock the driver's door, but cannot start the OMA28-0049
engine.
You can use the smart key to lock or unlock all
the doors and open the trunk through wireless
remote control.

57

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 57 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

Emergency key with conventional


ignition switch function

Hint
Mechanical key is generally used to oper-
ate the ignition switch. The remote key
can be used in case of emergency. For ex-
ample, if the remote transmitter fails, you
can use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door.

OMA28-0008 OMA28-0036

Press the button (see the arrow) to pop up the According to the vehicle equipment, the key set
mechanical key. Mechanical key is used to lock still contains another mechanical key. The me-
or unlock the driver's door and turn the ignition chanical key can be used to lock or unlock the
switch to start the engine. driver’s door and perform ignition operation as
well.

58

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 58 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.2 Smart key the truck can unlock without your smart key.

Keyless entry (applicable to some Hint


models) Once the vehicle exceeds 1.5 km/h, the
trunk will not unlock.

OMA28-0071

- When the vehicle power is OFF, with


your remote control and all the doors
closed, if you press the outside button of
the driver's door handle (see the arrow),
OMA28-0071 all the doors lock.

- When power of complete vehicle is


"OFF", driver who bring the remote key
press outside button of driver side door
handle by hand to turn by allow direction.
as a result, all door were unlock.
- When the power supply of the vehicle
is in OFF condition, the driver can hold
mechanical key and go near the trunk. At
this moment, press the button of trunk to
unlock the trunk. If the doors unlock and
the vehicle is stationary,

59

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 59 2016/7/11 16:04:34


2. Operating System and Equipment

Operation of keys of remote key - If you press the button on the remote - When the vehicle power is OFF, if button
control, all the doors lock. If the but- and button on the remote control
- When unlocking at a certain distance, are pressed for 2s, you can switch be-
ton on the smart key is pressed and
press remote key once, and four doors tween light alarm mode and sound and
held there for 2s, the driver's window light alarm mode.
are unlocked. If the button is pressed automatically closes. If the button on
and held there for 2s, the driver's win- the smart key is pressed and held there
dow opens automatically. If the button for 3s, the sunroof automatically closes. Hint
is pressed and held there for 3s, the Release the key on remote key to stop
sunroof opens automatically. Release actions of windows and sunroof. If successful, the horns sound 3 times
the key on remote key to stop actions of (only applied to electronic anti-theft
windows and sunroof. alarm).
Hint
- In a relatively far distance, press
on the remote key and hold it there for • When the door is locked, turn signal
1s to open the trunk lid. lamp will flash a long time.
• When the door is unlocked, turn sig-
nal lamp will flash twice.

60

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 60 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

Both remote control transmitter and battery There is an electric loop inside the key to trig-
Note are integrated in the smart key. The wireless ger anti-theft lock system. If this loop is dam-
receiver is mounted in the vehicle. If the battery aged, the key is unable to start the engine.
With the ignition switch or start switch in power is sufficient, the remote key can take ac-
tion within several meter distance. If there is a • Protect the keys from direct sunlight,
Position "ACC" or "ON", you cannot do high temperature, and high humidity.
the above operation with your remote key. barrier between car and remote key, under bad
weather condition or battery power is insuffi- • Do not drop the keys or set heavy ob-
cient, its effective area reduces. jects on them.
Hint • Do not get any liquid on your key. If
Hint damped, wipe it off immediately with a
The functions and operations of the but- soft cloth.
tons of the key with conventional ignition When operating the smart key, press the
switch function are the same as those of button slowly and firmly. The indicator
the key with PEPS. But the key with con- light will blink once every time. If not, may
ventional ignition switch function is not there is not enough electricity of the bat-
provided with keyless entry. tery, so must replace it as soon as pos-
sible.

61

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 61 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

Immobilizer System Replace battery


Hint
The vehicle is provided with the immobilizer When the battery in the smart key runs out,
• When any door is not closed, if system to prevent the vehicle from being sto- if the button on the key is pressed, the indi-
the button on the smart key is len. If you use an improperly-coded key (or cator light may be lit faintly or cannot be lit
pressed, four doors lock but unlock other tool) to start the engine, the fuel system and you need to press the button repeatedly
again immediately. If the button will not work. to lock or unlock the doors. Then, replace
the battery as soon as possible.
on the smart key is pressed with
the engine hood and the trunk lid Note
unclosed, the system will sound an Note
alarm.
If you enter your vehicle carrying a
• After the driver's door is unlocked matched key, the immobilizer system de- • Improper battery can damage the
by the smart key, if it is not opened activates automatically. remote transmitter.
within 30s, the system will re-lock it. • Be sure to use a new battery with
• If you find your smart key fails to the same rated voltage and size for
unlock or lock, press the button on replacement
the smart key quickly in a short time
for 3 times or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn it to Posi-
tion ON to recover the key function. Hint
• If the battery in the remote transmit-
ter needs to be replaced, have your
authorized GAC Motor dealer do it.
• The disposal of used battery must
follow relevant regulations and laws
for environment protection.

62

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 62 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.3 Central door lock sys- Open four doors Auto-unlock function
tem 1. When carrying an remote key within After the vehicle is stopped, if the four doors
about 1.0m away from the door, you can are closed and the ignition switch or start
Operating the central locking system in the unlock four doors through keyless entry switch is turned to "LOCK"/" OFF", the four
following two ways can lock and unlock all the (apply to the model with one-key start doors will not unlock automatically.
doors: function)

1. Operate the central door lock system Hint


with the remote key. Hint
"AUTO UNLOCK" is optional, which
2. Operate the central locking button to The default setting of existing models is can be activated via the sound setup
control the central locking system. If to press the buttons on the smart key interface(apply to some model) (refer to
defended by your smart key, the central page 199).
locking button can lock but unlock the to unlock the four doors automatically.
doors. You can also, through the vehicle sound
setting interface, press the button on
the smart key to unlock the driver's door
only, and press the button again to unlock
the other doors(apply to some models)
(refer to page 199).

63

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 63 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

Automatic lock function Door lock


Note
Turn ignition switch to “ON” and all doors are
closed; if the speed exceeds 20km/h, central When the lock tab locks, do not force to
door lock system locks all doors; if the speed is pull the door handle.
3km/h~20km/h, central door lock system locks
all doors in 30 seconds. Press the central lock-
ing button to unlock all doors. B A

1
Hint
“AUTO LOCK " is optional, which can
be turned on or off by your GAC MOTOR
dealer.
2
OMA28-0040

There is a lock tab -1-above each inner door


handle.
- Pushing back the driver's door latch
(1) in the direction of Arrow A locks the
driver's door.
- Pushing out the driver's door latch (1) in
the direction of Arrow B and pulling up
the handle (2) in the direction of Arrow
B can only open the driver's door. The
latch on other passenger door can only
lock or unlock its own door.

64

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 64 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

Central locking button Lock the door:


Warning
To lock all the doors, press the central locking
button side (Arrow A) on the driver's door. Do not leave the child or disabled in the
Open the door: vehicle alone. Once the doors are locked,
A in case of emergency, it is difficult for chil-
B dren or the disabled to leave the vehicle
To lock all the doors, press the central locking
button side (Arrow B) on the driver's door. by themselves. It will be more difficult to
rescue the child or disabled due to the
locked doors.
AU
TO

OMA28-0089

The central door lock button on the driver’s side


can lock and unlock the doors in the vehicle.

65

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 65 2016/7/11 16:04:35


2. Operating System and Equipment

Lock or unlock the doors with the


mechanical key.
Warning
To protect the door lock motor, the body
control system will enter the motor pro-
tection status if you unlock or lock suc-
cessively for 6 times in a short time (by
this time, you can unlock once more).
Then, pause for 5s before operating the
door lock again.

Lock Unlock

OMA28-0072

- To lock all the doors, insert your key into


the driver's door lock hole and turn it an-
ticlockwise.
- To unlock driver's door only, insert your
key into the driver's door lock hole and
turn it clockwise.

66

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 66 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.4 Doors
Close the door Child safety lock Deactivating child safety locks:
- Open the door with the child safety lock
The appropriate indicator on the cluster comes from outside.
on if any door is not closed tightly. Then, you
should: - As shown in the figure, turn the child
- Park the car safety lock tap from position to posi-
tion to deactivate the child safety lock.
- Open the door which is not closed tightly,
and close it tightly. To prevent children seated in the rear from ac-
cidentally opening the rear doors, activate the
child safety locks. With the child safety lock ac-
Warning
ock
dL
Chil
tivated, the door can only be opened from the
1 outside.
• Be sure to close the door with care.
Otherwise, the door not closed
tightly, may open suddenly, result-
OMA28-0039
Warning
ing in personal injury or accidents.
• When the running speed exceeds 5 Never leave the child or disabled person
km/h and the door isn't fully closed, Activating child safety locks: alone the car, because once the lock but-
a sound alarm will be produced to ton is pressed, the door will be locked
remind you. - Open the door whose childproof door immediately. When an emergency occurs,
lock needs to be activated. the child or disabled person feels difficult
- As shown in the figure, turn the child in leaving the car to protect himself. In the
safety lock tap from position to posi- event of accidents, it will be more difficult
to rescue the occupants in the vehicle due
tion to activate the child safety lock, to the locked doors.
and then close the door.

67

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 67 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.5 Trunk lid Warning


Open the trunk lid. If you have to drive your vehicle with the
trunk lid open, observe the following pre-
cautions:
• To prevent exhaust gas from get-
ting into the interior that causes
poisoning, open all windows, the
sun roof and the A/C Recirculation
system and open the vents on the
dashboard, and adjust the fan to the
maximum speed.
• Be sure to drive with extra care.
OMA28-0010
Make sure all items are loaded in the
trunk in a safe and firm manner, and
- In a relatively far distance, press try to avoid emergency braking and
on the remote key and hold it there for sudden turn. Otherwise, the open
OMA28-0188 1s to open the trunk lid. trunk lid may vibrate up and down,
and even cause personnel injury.
• Make sure the items outside the
- If you stand within 1.0 m away from the trunk are clearly marked to cause
trunk lid lock with your smart key, press drivers' attention. Failure to do so
the switch on the trunk lid to open the can cause accidents easily. Also,
trunk lid directly (applicable to some observe the local traffic laws and
models). regulations.

68

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 68 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

Close the trunk lid


Warning
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while
driving. Failure to do so can cause acci-
dents easily.
• Special attention should be paid
when closing the trunk lid to make
sure that no person is within the
opening and closing range.
• When closing the trunk lid, make
sure the trunk lid lock latch is
locked reliably to prevent the trunk
lid from opening suddenly.

OMA28-0153
Hint
- Lower the trunk lid down to the rear
bumper cover in the direction of the ar- • Lock immediately after the trunk lid
row, and then press it down to close it by is closed.
your hands. • If the trunk lid isn't closed, the clus-
ter screen will display relevant infor-
- Check whether the trunk lid lock catch is mation.
locked securely.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds 5
km/h, if the trunk lid is not closed
tightly, you will hear a beep.

69

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 69 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.6 Power window Electric window button on the driv- Opening and closing windows
er's side - If the button (-1) is pressed to the first
The electric window can be operated when the position, the window goes down until the
ignition switch or start switch is in Position ON. button is released or the window reaches
When the ignition switch is turned to Position its lowest position.
ACC or LOCK from ON, there are 40s for you
to operate the electric sunroof. If you open the - If the button (-1) is pushed up to the first
driver's door within such 40s, such function dis- position, the electric window will go up
enables automatically. As a result, you cannot all the way until the button is released or
continue to operate the electric sunroof. the electric window reaches its top posi-
1 tion.
5

AU
TO
2 - If the button (-1) is pressed to the sec-
4 ond position, the electric window auto-
matically goes all the way down. To stop
3 the window from going all the way down,
press or push up the button (-1).

OMA28-0043 - If the button (-1) is pushed up to the sec-


ond position, the electric window will go
up automatically. To stop it, you can just
1. Front left electric window button push down or up the button (-1).
2. Rear left electric window button - To open the other windows, push the
switch (2) , (3) or (4) briefly.
3. Rear right electric window button
- Pull up the key -2-, -3- or -4-, and close
4. Front right electric window button all corresponding doors and windows.
5. Occupant window lock button

70

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 70 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

- If the passenger window lock button (-5) Anti-pinch feature of driver’s win- Electric window button on passen-
is pressed, the button on the passenger
window does not work. With this switch dow ger side (taking passenger side for
pressed, the passengers’ windows can-
If the driver’s window senses any obstacle example)
not be raised or lowered. To unlock,
press the button again. while it is closing automatically, it will stop and
go down immediately. To close the window,
remove the obstacle, and then use the window
Note switch again.
If you find the electric window can lift, anti-trap
• Even if you leave your vehicle for function is ineffective or windows can't be fully
a short time, be sure to lock all the closed, please make initialization.
doors and windows, unless your ve-
hicle is supervised. To initialize it, pull the switch (1) up until the 1
window goes up to the extreme higher position,
• Attention should be paid when clos- and then pull the switch (1) up again and hold it
ing windows; otherwise serious there for 2~3 seconds.
injury may be caused.

Note OMA28-0108

If the power window system fails, contact


your authorized GAC Motor dealer to have 1. Front right electric window button
it checked. - If the button (1) is pressed, the window
was opened.
- If the button (1) is lifted, the window was
closed.

Hint
• The electric window button for front
passenger is operated in the same
way as that for rear passenger.
• No electric window for occupants is
provided with anti-pinch function.

71

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 71 2016/7/11 16:04:36


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.7 Power sunroof (appli- Open and close the sunroof visor. Open and close the electric sun-
cable to some models) roof.

The electric window can be operated when the


ignition switch or start switch is in Position ON. A
When the ignition switch is turned to Position DOOR

ACC or LOCK from ON, there are 40s for you


to operate the electric sunroof. If you open the
driver's door within such 40s, such function dis-
enables automatically. As a result, you cannot
continue to operate the electric sunroof. A
B

B
OMA28-0011

OMA28-0012
- Hold the catching groove and open the
sunroof visor in the direction of arrow A, - To open the sunroof slightly, click on the
and close it in the direction of arrow B. switch side (see arrow A). Then, the sun-
roof starts moving for a short distance
and then stops.
Note
- To open the sunroof slightly, click on the
• Close the power sunroof before switch side (see arrow B). Then, the sun-
closing the sunroof visor. roof starts moving for a short distance
and then stops.
• If the sunroof visor is closed but the
sunroof, rainwater can enter the ve- - If you press the switch on the side of
hicle when raining. Arrow A and hold it there for more than
0.4 seconds, the sunroof automatically
moves to the full open state.
- If you press the switch on the side of
Arrow B and hold it there for more than
0.4 seconds , the sunroof automatically

72

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 72 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

moves to the fully closed state.


- When the sunroof is fully closed, press
the switch on the side indicated by Ar-
row B, the sunroof will tilt outward. If the
sunroof tilt needs to be closed, press the
switch on the side of Arrow A.

Note
Even if you leave your vehicle for a short
time, be sure to lock the sunroof, unless
your vehicle is supervised. Otherwise,
sudden rain can splash the in-vehicle OMA28-0205 OMA28-0206
items.

- The figure shows the sunroof slides - The figure shows the rear side of sunroof
open. tilts.

73

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 73 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

Sunroof anti-trap function


Warning Note
The moonroof is provided with the anti-pinch
feature when sliding to close and closing down- • Be sure to close the moonroof with • Do not try to operate the moonroof
ward from tilting up. extra care. To avoid serious injury, in below-freezing temperatures (be-
make sure passengers are clear of low -20°) . In such environment, the
When in the sliding area, if the anti-pinch the moonroof before opening and anti-pitch feature may not be acti-
feature is activated, the moonroof will move closing it. vated, resulting in accidents. Also,
toward the direction of opening to the desired low temperature can damage the
position and stop. • Anti-pinch sunroof cannot prevent
your fingers or small items from be- moonroof motor.
When in the tilting area, if the anti-pinch feature ing pinched.
is activated, the moonroof will move toward the • The anti-pinch feature stops sens-
direction of tilting to the extreme tilting position. ing when the moonroof is almost
The purpose of the anti-pinch feature is to closed to cancel this function.
prevent the moonroof from running into any ob- • Do not attempt to activate the anti-
stacle when it is closing. If the moonroof runs pinch feature by hand or your body
into any obstacle while it is closing, it will stop part. Doing so can cause serious
and then return back a bit. injury easily.

74

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 74 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

Manual initialization and self-study Detailed operation is shown below:


of sunroof - With the sunroof fully open, press the
switch on the side of Arrow A to allow the
In some cases (sudden battery lost or pro- sunroof to move to the mechanical stop
longed use of vehicle) , the moonroof needs to point.
be initialized manually.
- If you press the switch on the side of Ar-
row A and hold it there for more than 10
seconds, you will finish the initialization.
A If you finish initialization, continue the fol-
DOOR lowing operation to allow the sunroof to
do self-learning.
- If you press the switch on the side of Ar-
row B and hold it there, the glass will do
stepping motion, and this indicates it is
B self-learning.
- The sunroof starts operating automati-
cally throughout the travel from the me-
chanical stop position (including tilt) until
it reaches the fully closed position and
OMA28-0012 does not move.
- Self-study is finished.

75

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 75 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.2.8 Engine compartment


cover
Open and close the engine hood

OMA28-0191 OMA28-0142

- Push up the opener for the engine hood - Push the engine hood open and support
in the direction indicated by the arrow to it to its limit position using the hydraulic
unlock the engine hood fully. Then, you strut.
can open the engine hood.
OMA28-0189
- When closing the engine compartment
cover, lower the engine compartment
cover to get near the fender, and use
- Park your vehicle on level ground and hands to press the engine compartment
apply the parking brake. cover with hard force. After the engine
compartment cover is closed, inspect
- Pull up the engine hood opener on the whether the buckle is locked firmly.
lower left corner of the instrument panel
to unlock the engine hood.
Note
When the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h,
if the hood is not closed tightly, you will
hear a beep.

76

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 76 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

Warning
2.2.9 Basic operation of anti- Engine anti-theft:
theft The vehicle is OFF and anti-theft has been
Engine compartment is a hazard area completed. Legal key is in the vehicle. The
where improper operation may cause seri- owner presses the switch twice. If anti-theft
ous injuries or deaths.
Anti-theft - unlock: system allows it, fuel injection and ignition are
executed; if not, the ignition is executed without
• If you see vapor or coolant over- When the vehicle is OFF, four doors are locked. fuel injection and the horn sounds and turn sig-
flowing from the engine compart- When the owner puts the hand in door handle nal lamps flashes twice.
ment, do not open the hood. Doing from the outside or unlocks by remote key, anti-
so can seriously scald you. theft system unlocks doors. At the same time,
• When the engine is hot, do not the instrument and lamps flash twice.
touch it. Doing so can seriously
scald you. Anti-theft - lock:
• Never open the coolant expansion When the vehicle is OFF, four doors are locked
tank cover when the engine is in hot and legal key is outside, but not inside the
condition. At this moment, the cool- vehicle. When the owner presses small switch
ing system is in high temperature on door handle or press remote key, anti-theft
and pressure condition. system unlocks doors. At the same time, the
• When the engine starting or run- instrument and lamps flash once.
ning, do not touch the drive belt,
alternator, radiator fan and other Trigger to open doors - anti-theft:
rotating components and the high-
voltage ignition system. When the vehicle is OFF, four doors are locked.
The owner does not have legal key. Unlock the
doors and open them again, anti-theft system
will trigger the horn and turn signal lamps flash
Hint twice.

Lubricate the moving part of the unlocking


mechanism of the engine hood properly
to help open or close the engine hood.

77

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 77 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3 Headlights and Visual Field


2.3.1 External lights layout
1. High beam lamp
1 2 3 4 2. Low beam lamp
- High/low beams (Halogen) (applicable to
some models)
- Xenon high/low beams (applicable to
some models)
3. Front turn signal light
4. Side turn signal lamp
5. Front position lamp
6. Daytime running lights (applicable to
some models)
7. Front fog light

7 6 5
OMA28-0100

78

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 78 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

8. High-mounted brake lamp


9. Rear position lamp/brake lamp
10. Rear turn signal light
8 9 10
11. Rear fog lamp
12. Reverse lamp
13. License plate lamp

13 13 12 11
OMA28-0101

79

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 79 2016/7/11 16:04:37


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.2 Light combination 8. Rear fog lamp Turn signal lamp


switch 9. Front fog light - Pulling the light combination switch lever
10. OFF (fog lamp is turned off) up or down to its limit position turns on
the right or left turn signals, and
corresponding flickering display appears
1 on the combination instrument or the
2 indicator light comes on.
7
6 OFF OFF
10
5
AUTO
9 Note
3 4 8
If any turn signal on the front end or rear
1 end fails, the turn indicators in the cluster
will flash a double frequency.

OMA28-0038

1. Turn signal light


2. Turn on high beams.
3. Flash headlamp high beam lamp
4. Low beams (with the headlights ON)
5. Side-marker light
6. AUTO (auto lights) (applicable to some
models)
7. OFF (door lamp is turned off)

80

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 80 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

High beam lamp Headlamp flasher Auto light (applicable to some


- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to - Turn the ignition switch or start switch to models)
"ON" position. "ON" position. - Turn the ignition switch or start switch to
- Turn the switch to the low beam position. - Pulling the light combination switch le- "ON" position.
- Pushing the light combination switch ver to Position -3 turns on the headlight - Turning the light switch to Position AUTO
lever forward to its limit position turns on flasher. turns on the auto lighting function.
high beams, and the indicator light
is lit on the combination instrument ac-
cordingly. Warning Hint
- Pull the light combination switch lever Even if there isn't vehicle light turned on, • Enable AUTO LIGHT function. The
backward to its original position to turn as long as you hold on to the switch lever vehicle automatically turns on or
off the high beams. of the light combination switch, the high off the headlights based on ambient
beam flashers will keep flashing and the light. When the ambient light out-
indicator light in the cluster will be illumi- side the vehicle dims, the position
Warning nated. lights are turned on, and then the
low beams. When the ambient light
High beams of the headlamps may dazzle outside the vehicle brightens, the
the drivers of other vehicles nearby, re- low beams go out, and then the po-
sulting in accidents. sition lights. When entering a tunnel
or garage or other environment, the
position lights and low beams will
be automatically turned on at the
same time.
• You can adjust auto light sensitiv-
ity via the configuration menu of
multimedia display interface. The
higher the sensitivity, the brighter
the lights (refer to page 200).

81

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 81 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Side marker lights


Hint Warning
- When the lighting switch is turned to
• After automatic light is turned on Automatic lamp function is only one sup- Position , the position lights, dash-
and the wiper runs for a period of plementary function, and the driver shall board lights, license plate lights and am-
time, dip beam and position lamp control light according to actual require- bient lights (applicable to some models)
will be opened automatically, which ments. are lit and the corresponding indicator
are used for auxiliary lighting in light on the combination instrument
the rain. When the wiper is off for a will be lit as well.
period, position lamp and dip beam
are turned off automatically.
Note
Note If any turn signal on the front end or rear
end fails, the turn indicators in the cluster
• If the instrument cluster display will flash a double frequency.
prompts "The sensor fails, please
manually control the lights", for the Low beams
sake of safety, the system will keep
low beams turned on. Then, you - Turning the light switch to Position
can choose to manually control the turns on the headlights (with low beams
lights, and go to your GAC MOTOR turned on by default).
dealer timely for inspection and
maintenance.
• In the haze environment, the lights
will not turn on automatically. You
need to turn on the lights manually.

82

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 82 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Fog lamp Headlamp unturned-off warning Headlamp lag turning off function
- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to - With the ignition switch in or start switch - Within 10 minutes after the ignition
"ON" position. "LOCK" / "OFF" Position, if the low switch or start switch turned to the
beams or high beams are turned on "LOCK" / "OFF" position if you turn the
- Turn the light switch to the position for when you open the driver's door, the headlight switch to other position from
side marker lights or low beams. system gives a loud alarm sound and the OFF position and then turn it back to
- Turning the fog light switch from "OFF" the combination instrument displays the OFF position within 2s.
"LIGHTS ARE LIT".
to Position turns on front fog lights. - If this function is activated, the low-
Turning the fog light switch to Posi- beam lamp will light up for 30s. If any of
tion turns on both front and rear fog Warning the doors (including four doors, engine
compartment cover and hatchback) is
lights. Turning the fog light switch again opened within 30s, the time is reset and
turns off the rear fog lights but the front When the vehicle is moving at night or the low-beam lights up for 80s. If all
fog lights stay on. The corresponding in- in poor visibility, do not turn on the side doors are closed, the time is reset and
dicator and light will be lit on the marker lights only. Failure to do so can the low-beam lamp lights up for 30s. If
instrument cluster. cause accidents easily. Turn on low beams another door is opened in this course,
when driving at night or in poor visibility the time is reset and low-beam lamp
- When the headlights switch is turned off, environments. lights up for 80s.
the front and rear fog lights go out.

83

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 83 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Manual adjustment of headlamp Headlamp cleaning device (appli- Adaptive system turnoff indicator
height (applicable to some models) cable to some models) lamp (applicable to some models)
The adaptive system will adjust headlamp
beam to proper direction according to current
condition. The system will adjust headlamp
beam to left or right direction depending on
vehicle speed and steering angle of steering
wheel, and cooperate with manual adjustment
system of headlamp height to improve bright-
2
L
O
R
A
OFF
L
O
R
A
OFF
AFS
OFF
ness at an intersection or in turning condition.
1
0

OFF OFF

OMA28-0113 OMA28-0123

According to changes in the vehicle conditions Turn the ignition switch or start switch to "ON"
due to occupants and baggage, you can manu- position and make the low-beam lamp or high-
ally adjust the lighting range of headlights (low beam lamp in turning on position, and then
beams) to Position "0", "1", "2", or "3". press the headlamp cleaning button on the left
of steering column and keep for 1s to activate
headlamp cleaning device.

Note
• It is necessary to regularly clean the
headlamp shade.
• Headlamp cleaning device and
windshield cleaning device share
the same fluid reservoir.

84

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 84 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Hazard warning lamp


Hint
• When the adaptive system is turned
off, this system indicator lamp lights VOL
AM/FM NAVI
TUNE

up. When the adaptive system is ac-

SEL
tivated, this system indicator lamp
MODE MENU SET

L
O
R
A
OFF
AFS
OFF
goes out.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds 5
km/h, the intelligent adaptive sys-
OFF

OFF TEMP MODE

tem of headlight begins to work. A/C TEMP


AUTO

• If this system has a fault, the cluster


screen displays warning informa-
tion. Please contact your dealer
OMA28-0124 authorized by our company to make
your car overhauled.
OMA28-0093
If you want to disable the adaptive system, just
press the switch for several second to turn off
this system. If you want to activate this system, In the event of emergency, using the hazard
please re-press this switch. warning lights can cause other road users’ at-
tention to avoid leading to traffic accidents.

85

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 85 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Turn on the hazard warning lights in one of the After the hazard warning lamp is turned on, all Lane-change flashing signal
following conditions: turn signal lamps light up at the same time. And
two turn signal indicator lamps on cluster and With the ignition switch in Position "ON", pull up
• Vehicle breakdown due to technical fail- all indicator lamps in hazard warning switch or down the control lever for turn signal control
ure. also light up. With the ignition switch or start switch to the limit position within 100~700 mil-
• At the end of traffic flow during traffic switch in "LOCK" /"OFF" Position , the hazard liseconds, and then release the control lever.
jam. warning lights still work. Then, both the turn signals on the correspond-
ing side and the corresponding turn signal indi-
• In emergency. cator light in the instrument cluster flash three
Note times.
• Towing another vehicle or being towed.
• Prolonged use of the hazard warn-
ing lights will consume the electric
quantity of the battery even if you
turn the ignition switch or start
switch to the "LOCK" /"OFF" posi-
tion.
• Follow the relevant laws and regula-
tions when using the hazard warn-
ing lights.
• If the hazard warning lights fail, to
cause other road users’ attention,
be sure to take other measures
which comply with the relevant traf-
fic laws and regulations.

86

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 86 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

Lighting for getting on the vehicle Lighting for locating the vehicle
- When you approach your car, press the - If the button on remote key is pressed
button on the remote control key, and the twice, the position lamp lights up for 8s
position light will come on for 25s. The and left and right turn signal lamps are
auxiliary lighting function of the position activated and flash for 3 times. to help
light will help to familiarize yourself with you determine the specific location of the
the obstacles around your car. Press the vehicle.
button again, and the position light will
come on again for 25s.
- When the ignition switch or start switch
is turned to the ON position, the position
light will go out.

87

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 87 2016/7/11 16:04:38


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.3 Interior lighting lamp Front dome reading lamp Rear ceiling reading light (appli-
cable to some models)
Ceiling Lights
DOOR

DOOR

OMA28-0014

OMA28-0015
OMA28-0013 - Pressing the switch for front left or right
roof reading lights once turns on the
- Pressing the switch for rear left or right
reading lights accordingly. Pressing it
- Pressing the DOOR switch for the front roof reading lights once turns on the
again turns off the reading lights.
roof lights once turns on the automatical- reading lights accordingly. Pressing it
ly-activated function for the roof lights. again turns off the reading lights.
If the doors are open, the front and rear
roof lights automatically come on. If the
doors are closed, the front and rear roof
lights automatically go out.
- Press DOOR again to turn off the auto-
matic function for the roof lights.

88

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 88 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

Courtesy Lights (applicable to Trunk lights Vanity mirror lights (applicable to some models)
some models) - The lights in the trunk will come on au- - Lamps are provided on both sides of
tomatically when the trunk lid is opened, dressing mirror, turn ignition switch to
- A courtesy light is located below each “ON”, turn on dressing mirror cover and
and go out when the lid is closed.
door. The courtesy light in each door dressing mirror lamp are lit automatically.
comes on when the door is opened.
- Close dressing mirror cover, and dress-
- The courtesy light goes out when the Hint ing mirror lamp goes out.
door is closed.
When the ignition switch or start switch is
placed to "OFF" position and after the ve-
hicle door is closed, the lighting lamp will
go out after 15min to save battery power.

89

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 89 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.4 Windshield Wipers 8. Open rear window cleaning system


9. Open rear wiper
Manual wiper combination switch 10. OFF(turn off rear wiper)

7 6
8
1 9
2 MIST
OFF
10
3 INT OFF

8
LO
HI
4
5

OMA28-0095

1. MIST (continuous wiper operation)


2. OFF(turn off the front wiper)
3. INT (intermittent wiper operation)
4. LO (Slow wiper operation)
5. HI (High-speed wiper operation)
6. Open front windshield cleaning system
7. Adjust the interval for intermittent wiper
operation.

90

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 90 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

Automatic wiper combination 9. Open rear wiper Continuous wiping


switch 10. OFF(turn off rear wiper) - If the wiper combination switch lever is
turned to MIST, the wipers operate con-
tinuously until the lever is released.

7 6
1
8 Close front wiper
9
2 MIST
10
OFF
- If the wiper combination switch lever is
3 AUTO OFF

turned to OFF, the wipers stop.


8
LO
HI
4
5
Intermittent wiper operation (man-
ual wiper)
OMA28-0037 - If the wiper combination switch lever is
turned to INT, the wipers operate auto-
matically at the intermittent frequency. Its
1. MIST (continuous wiper operation) interval can be adjusted via the intermit-
2. OFF(turn off the front wiper) tent knob for wiper (-7).

3. AUTO (automatic wiper operation)


4. LO (Slow wiper operation)
5. HI (High-speed wiper operation)
6. Turning on the washer system
7. Adjust the sensitivity of automatic wiper
operation.
8. Open rear window cleaning system

91

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 91 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

Automatic wiper operation (auto- - If the control lever is released, the Adjust auto wiper sensitivity (man-
washer system stops operating, but the
matic wiper) wipers continue to work for about 4s. ual wiper).
- If the wiper combination switch lever is - After pause for 6s, the wipers operate - Turn the knob in the direction of Arrow
turned to AUTO, the wipers will operate once to remove residual water droplets 7 to adjust the sensitivity of automatic
automatically. The wiper system adjusts on the glass. wiper operation, increasing from top to
the wiper operation speed in real time bottom and becoming more sensitive to
based on the current rainfall and vehicle raindrop gradually.
speed.
Open rear window cleaning system - In the case of the same rainfall, the
higher the sensitivity, the faster the wiper
- Rotate rear wiper knob to position speed and frequency.
Low speed wiping -8--8- along the arrow to open rear
- If the wiper combination switch lever is window cleaning system, and the wiper
turned to LO, the wipers operate at low will start to wipe later on. Open rear wiper
speed. - Rotate rear wiper knob to “OFF” to close - Rotate rear wiper knob to posi-
rear window cleaning system.
tion-9- -9- along the arrow to open
High speed wiping rear wiper.
Adjust the interval for wiper opera- - Rotate rear wiper knob to “OFF” position
- If the wiper combination switch lever is to close rear wiper.
turned to HI, the wipers operate at high tion (manual wiper).
speed.
- Turn the knob in the direction of Arrow 7
to adjust the interval of intermittent wiper Close rear wiper
operation, increasing from top to bottom.
Open front windshield cleaning - Turn rear wiper knob to “OFF” position,
system rear wiper will stop washing and wiping.

- Pull the wiper combination switch lever


in the direction of Arrow 6 (towards the
steering wheel) to enable the washer
system. Later, the wipers begin operat-
ing.

92

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 92 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

Note Warning
• Worn or dirty wiper blades will af- Rain sensor is only one auxiliary device.
fect front visibility adversely and The driver shall use windshield wiper ac-
reduce driving safety! cording to actual requirements.
• Automatic wiper operation fail-
ure: When the instrument cluster
prompts "The sensor fails, please
control the wipers manually", for the
sake of safety, the wipers will keep
operating at low speed. Then, you
can manually control the wipers ac-
cording to the actual situation, and
go to your GAC MOTOR dealer time-
ly for inspection and maintenance.
• Before auto wiper operation in win-
ter, make sure the wiper blade is not
frozen.
• If sensing surface of rain sensor is
dirty, automatic wiper function will
be invalid.

93

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 93 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.5 Windshields
Windshield
The front windshield uses green, insulate,
laminated and anti-scattered glass, effectively
reducing the risk of injury during a crash.

OMA28-0104

94

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 94 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.6 Rearview mirror Manual interior anti-glare rearview mirror (ap-


plicable to some models)
Auto interior anti-glare rearview mirror (appli-
cable to some models)

Interior rearview mirror


Not seeing the rear clearly through the rear
windshield is extremely dangerous to driving!
The interior rearview mirror is provided with
anti-glare function. When driving at night, the
mirror face can weaken the reflect light from
the rear to achieve the best rearview field.

A
B OMA28-0016 OMA28-0017

- Turn the adjusting lever for the exterior - With the ignition switch or start switch in
mirrors in the direction of Arrow A to "ON" Position, the automatic anti-glare
deflect the reflect light from rear, thus function is automatically turned on.
achieving anti-glare function.
- Pressing the switch (indicated by the ar-
- Turn the adjusting lever for the exterior row) turns off the auto anti-glare feature
mirrors in the direction of Arrow B to re- or turns on it again.
turn to the normal rearview angle.

95

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 95 2016/7/11 16:04:39


2. Operating System and Equipment

Hint
• When the switch of anti-dazzling
function is pressed, the indicator
lamp lights up to indicate that this
function is activated.
• When the temperature inside car
is low, the rearview mirror requires
longer time to make its surface turn
dim after it detects light emitted by
headlamp of the car behind it.

OMA28-0018

Note
To ensure the sensors for anti-glare rear-
view mirrors on both sides of the exterior
mirror operate properly, do not touch or
cover the sensor indicated by the arrow
using your fingers or a cloth.

96

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 96 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

Exterior mirrors Electric adjustment of outside rearview mirror Electric folding (applicable to some models)

Operate the button on the dashboard of the - To fold the exterior mirrors automati-
driver's side to adjust the exterior mirrors. cally, turn the adjusting knob to Position
.
- To unfold the exterior mirrors, turn the
adjusting knob out from Position .
O
L R
A
OFF
2

Note
1
0

OFF

• For models with electric folding mir-


rors, do not fold the mirror manually
unless necessary ;
OMA28-0053 • If the exterior mirror really needs to
be folded manually, be sure to un-
fold it through manual mode instead
- Turn the adjusting knob for the exterior of electric switch. When unfold-
mirrors to Position "L" or "R" (corre- ing, you can hear a 'click' sound,
sponding to the left or right exterior mir- and this means the exterior mirror
ror). reaches its locking position.
- Turn the adjusting knob for exterior mir-
rors in any direction to adjust the exterior
mirrors to an appropriate rearview angle.

97

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 97 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

Defogging exterior mirrors (applicable to some


models) Warning Hint
• The outside mirrors with curved sur- • If there is no longer necessary to
VOL face (convex and sphere) are able to defog the outside mirrors, turn off
the heater to avoid consuming the
TUNE
AM/FM

expand view, but compared with the


NAVI

SEL
MODE MENU SET
real objects, their reflected images battery.
become smaller and further. Do not • If the outside mirror’ electric adjust-
judge the distance away from the ment function fails, you can gently
rear vehicle with its reflected image push the outer edge of the mirror to
OFF TEMP

AUTO
MODE
when changing lanes. Doing so can adjust it.
A/C TEMP
cause accidents due to misjudg- • The following descriptions apply to
ment. cars equipped with outside electric
• Special attention should be paid not foldable rearview mirrors: If the
to make your fingers injured by rear- rearview mirror frame has displace-
view mirror or its base when folding ment due to external force, the
OMA28-0106
outside rearview mirror. rearview mirror must be fully folded
electrically, and it is not allowed to
use hands to adjust rearview mirror
- If the defrosting and defogging button frame. Otherwise, functions of rear-
(indicated by the arrow) is pressed, the Note view mirror may be affected.
heating function will be activated to re-
move fog or frost from outside mirrors • Within 15 minutes after the exterior
and rear window. Then, the indicator light mirror defogger is turned off, to cut
on the button comes on. After about 15 off heating and defogging the mir-
minutes, the system turns off the feature rors and rear windshield, just press
automatically. the button again.
• If the fog and frost on the outside
mirrors and rear windshield still
need to be removed, just press the
button again.

98

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 98 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.3.7 View
Sunvisor

Hint
• The lighting lamp of dressing mirror
above the sun visor will be turned
off automatically when the car is
locked, ignition switch or start
switch is placed to "LOCK"/"OFF"
position and several minutes after
and CHILD RESTRAINTS.
ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS
from the air bag.
Sit as far back as possible
dhild seat in the front.
NEVER put a rear-facing
SAFEST place for Children.
The BACK SEAT is the bag.
can be killed by the air
Children12 and under
INJURY can occur.
DEATH or SERIOUS
WARNING

the door is closed, to prevent bat-


tery from continuing to discharge.

OMA28-0065 OMA28-0066

- The sun visors on the driver's side and - If the sun visors on the driver's side and
front passenger side can be turned down front passenger side are turned down,
to shield the sunlight coming from the each can be pulled out from its own
front windows. holder to shield the sunlight coming from
the side windows.
- To use the vanity mirror, drop down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror
cover.

99

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 99 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4 Seats and Inte- Before driving, observe the following require-
ments to adjust the front seat properly to make Warning
sure:
rior Convenience • You can maintain full control of the ve- Incorrect sitting posture will cause seri-
ous injury.
Items hicle in an accurate, effective and safe
manner. • Any passenger should sit upright
and well back in the seat.
• You sit in a correct posture, providing
2.4.1 Importance for adjust- relaxation and indefatigability. • Be sure you and your passengers
wear the seat belts and wear them
ing the seat correctly • Fully play the protective effect of seat properly.
belts and airbags. • Make sure the child is restrained in
To get the most protection from the seat belts the child restraint system properly.
and airbags, adjust the seats properly. • Adjust all the head restraints prop-
Driver's seat or front passenger's seat can be erly according to the height of the
adjusted according to the shape of passengers. driver and passengers and be sure
the driver and passengers wear the
seat belts to get the best protection.
• When driving, always place your
feet within the foot space well. Do
not let your feet rest on the instru-
ment panel, stretch out the window
orcurl over the seat. Incorrect sitting
posture will cause serious injury
when the airbags inflating.

100

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 100 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.2 Headrest Warning Note


Adjusting the head restraints properly is of
great importance to protect the occupants and • Driving with the head restraints Shorter persons should adjust their re-
reduce the risk of injury. removed or improperly-adjusted/ straint as low as possible. Taller persons
installed can cause serious injury should adjust their restraint as high as
during a crash. possible.
• Have passengers adjust their head
restraints according to their body
types.
• Improperly-adjusted head restraints
will increase the chance of being
injured during a crash or emergency
braking.
• Properly adjust the head restraint
until it fits your height. The top of
the restraint must be even with
the top of your head as far as pos-
sible but not lower than your eyes.
The back of your head should rest
OMA28-0001
against the restraint as far as pos-
sible.
Adjust the head restraint so the center of the
back of your head rests against the center of
the restraint.
Failure to do so as shown in the figure can
cause serious injury during a crash.

101

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 101 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

Adjusting front seat head restraints Adjustment of height of rear seat


headrest Warning
During traveling condition, never remove
the headrest, to avoid serious injury when
B an accident occurs.
• After the installation of headrest,
you must adjust the headrest ac-
B cording to your shape, to obtain
optimal protection.
A • As you sit in back seat, if you are
unable to adjust your headrest to
proper position, please sit on your
adjacent seat.
• Please carefully read and follow rel-
OMA28-0061
A evant warnings and instructions.
OMA28-0067
- Grasp both sides of the headrestraint,
and press and hold the button in the - Grasp both sides of the headrestraint,
direction of Arrow A and press the head- and press and hold the button in the
restraint down in the direction of Arrow B direction of Arrow A and press the head-
to the desired position. restraint down in the direction of Arrow B
- Grasp both sides of the headrestraint, to the desired position.
and lift up the headrestraint directly in - Grasp both sides of the headrestraint,
the direction of Arrow B to the desired and lift up the headrestraint directly in
position. the direction of Arrow B to the desired
- Make sure head restraints are in place position.
and positioned properly. - Make sure head restraints are in place
and positioned properly.

102

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 102 2016/7/11 16:04:40


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.3 Front seats Adjust seat height (applicable to some models) Electrically adjustable driver's seat
- Repeatedly pull up and push down the (applicable to some models)
Manually adjustable driver's seat handle on original position in arrow-2
direction, and the seat will be lifted or
(applicable to some models) descended gradually.
3 3

Adjusting the seatback angle


2
- Push the adjusting lever on the left side
of the seat in the direction of Arrow 3 to 1 1
adjust the seat back to the desired posi-
tion. Then, release the adjusting lever.
3 2
2
1

OMA28-0119

2 OMA28-0096 Adjusting the seat forward or backward and the


seat height
Adjusting the seat forward or backward - Press the switch in arrow-1 direction to
adjust the front or back position of the
- To adjust the seat forward or backward, seat.
pull up on the bar under the seat cush-
ion’s front edge in the direction indicated - Press the switch in arrow-2 direction to
by Arrow 1. M o v e t h e s e a t t o t h e adjust the height of the whole seat.
desired position. Release the adjusting
handle and slightly move the seat back-
ward and forward until the seat lock is Adjusting the seatback
clipped firmly.
- Pull the switch back and forth in the di-
rection of Arrow 3 to adjust the seat back
to the desired position.

103

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 103 2016/7/11 16:04:41


2. Operating System and Equipment

Manually adjustable front passen- Adjusting the seatback angle


Warning ger seat (applicable to some mod- - Push the adjusting lever on the left side
els) of the seat in the direction of Arrow 2 to
• Make all seat adjustments before adjust the seat back to the desired posi-
you start driving. To adjust the seat, tion. Then, release the adjusting lever.
you need to deviate your correct
sitting shape. Therefore, the adjust-
ment of driver's seat and front pas-
senger's seat should be carried out
when the car is in stationary condi-
tion. Otherwise, it is easy to cause
injuries.
• After the ignition switch or start 2
switch is turned to "LOCK" position,
the electric adjusting mechanism of 1
front and rear seats are still effec-
tive. Never leave the child alone the
car, to prevent her or him from im-
proper operation of electrical device
and causing accidents. OMA28-0120
• Be sure to adjust the seats with
care. Negligence or improper opera- Adjusting the seat forward or backward
tion can cause accidents, resulting
in personal injury. - Pull up the adjusting lever on the lower
front of the front passenger seat in the
• Do not recline the seatback exces- direction of Arrow 1 to adjust the seat to
sively while driving. Doing so will the desired position. Release the adjust-
cause serious injury! To get the ing handle and slightly move the seat
most protection from the seat belt, backward and forward until the seat lock
be sure to sit upright and well back is clipped firmly.
in the seat and wear the seat belt
properly. The farther a seat-back is
reclined, the greater the risk that
you will slide under the belt and be
seriously injured in a severe crash.

104

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 104 2016/7/11 16:04:41


2. Operating System and Equipment

Seat heating (applicable to some Manual seat heating has three positions cor-
models)
responding to three different seat surface tem- Warning
peratures, i.e., Position 3 for high temperature,
Position 2 for middle temperature, and Position If your sensitiveness to pain and tempera-
1 for low temperature. Pressing the switch once ture lowers, never use seat heating func-
changes the gear once. The gear will change in tion, to avoid your back, hips and legs
the circular order of 0→3→2→1 →0. The indi- being burnt by the heater.
cator light corresponding to the number is lit on
the switch surface.
In addition, you can set automatic heating
100 120

Note
140

km/h function through the configuration menu of


the multimedia display to achieve automatic
seat heating. The seat heating position will be • To avoid damage of electrical parts
determined automatically based on the interior inside the front seat, never knee on
VOL TUNE
AM/FM NAVI SEL

temperature. If the heating switch is pressed in the seat or exert force to some point
MODE MENU SET

the process of automatic heating, the automatic of seat cushion or backrest.


OFF TEMP MODE heating exits, and the current heating position • If you cannot feel the seat tempera-
is moved to the next one. ture change or feel hot after being
AUTO

A/C

OMA28-0090
TEMP

heated for a long time, immediately


cut off the seat heating and go to
- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to your GAC MOTOR dealer for inspec-
"ON" position. tion and maintenance.
- Pressing the heating button (indicated by
the arrow) in the center of the instrument
panel selects the position for seat heat-
ing temperature.

105

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 105 2016/7/11 16:04:41


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.4 Rear seat Warning


Folded function of rear seat

Rear seat center armrest (appli- If you pivot the seat armrest down, neither
cable to certain vehicle model) adult nor child is permitted to sit on the
center of the rear seat.

OMA28-0208

If it is necessary to put a large object on rear


seat, rear seat can be folded.
OMA28-0203
- Pull up rear seat cushion by hand, turn
over seat cushion to front seat direction
- Pull down it in arrow direction to open to limit position (turnover methods of left
central handle. and right seat cushions are the same).
- To turn back the seat armrest, pull up it
an push it into the rear seat back.

106

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 106 2016/7/11 16:04:41


2. Operating System and Equipment

Hint
A A
B B • Rear seats on the left and right of
can be folded respectively. When
rear seat on one side is folded, rear
seat on the other side can still be
occupied by one passenger.
• If front seat backrest blocks rear
backrest and you cannot fold rear
seat backrest completely, it is nec-
essary to remove the headrest. The
headrest removed is placed stably.

OMA28-0209 OMA28-0062

Note
- Turn rear seat headrest to the minimum - Pull rear seat backrest turnover switch
position. along arrow A, to turn over rear seat Before rear seat is restored to original
backrest along arrow B. position, take out seat belt and seat belt
- To restore it, push the seat to original buckle; otherwise, seat belt and seat belt
position in the opposite direction. After buckle may be pressed behind rear seat
restoring, pull seat backrest to check if backrest or rear seat cushion.
the backrest is fixed.

107

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 107 2016/7/11 16:04:41


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.5 Interior Convenience


Items
Storage compartment on driver's Storage shelf on central console
Storage compartment for lower door inner trim
guard plate of cab
OFF TEMP
MODE

A/C TEMP

AUT
O
O R
L A
OFF

AUX

3 OFF

OMA28-0057
OMA28-0041
This storage shelf can be used to store small
OMA28-0042 articles such as coins.
Storage compartment on driver's door inner
trim can be used to store articles such as map,
Storage shelf of lower panel in driver's cab is manual, etc.
used to store small articles such as cards and
decorations.
Note
The positions of storage compartment on
all door inner trims are about the same.
Never put chocolates or drugs and other
heat sensitive goods on storage compart-
ment on front and rear door inner trims.

108

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 108 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

Front beverage holder Rear cup holder (applicable to


some models)
Warning
Do not place hot drinks on the beverage
holders. During normal traveling condi-
tion, an accident occurs or an emergent
brake is exerted, the hot drink may be

13 5
sprayed out to scald driver or passengers.

24 R

OMA28-0109

OMA28-0204
Front drink cup shelf can be used to store drink
cans. - Pull down the center armrest for rear
seat.
- Open the rear cup holder cover in the
direction of the arrow.

109

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 109 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

Console compartment Glove box Glasses case

DOOR

TUNE
SET
L
SE
5 6 SCAN

MODE

OMA28-0051 OMA28-0117 OMA28-0019

- To open the center headrest box, pull up - Open the glove box by pulling the handle - Pressing the outer surface of the glasses
its lid in the direction indicated by the ar- outward. case drops down the glasses case slowly.
row.
- Close it with a firm push.
- Put it down to close the front center arm-
rest box.
Warning
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving! An open glove box can cause se-
rious injury to your passenger in a crash
or emergency braking. To prevent articles
inside glove box from being thrown away,
you need to close the glove box cover.

110

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 110 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

Warning
• Do not place items on the dash-
DOOR board. The above items may be
scattered in the compartment during
acceleration, braking or cornering,
distracting the driver’s attention and
causing an accident.
• Always make sure the items on the
console and in other storage fa-
cilities will not roll into the driver's
footwell while driving. Otherwise,
when an emergent brake is exerted
OMA28-0020 or an emergency occurs, it may af-
fect the driver to operate brake ped-
- To close the glasses case, turn it up. al, clutch pedal (cars equipped with
manual transmissions) or accelera-
tor pedal, and cause accidents.
• Cloths hung on cloths hook should
not hinder driver's vision. Failure to
do so can cause accidents. Cloths
hook can be used only to hang light
cloths without sharp or heavy ar-
ticles. Otherwise, when an emergent
brake is exerted or an emergency
occurs, especially when the airbag
is triggered, the above articles may
cause serious injury to passengers.

111

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 111 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.6 Cigarette lighter/Power Warning Note


outlet
• Improper use of cigarette lighter/ • To avoid damage to the electrical
Console cigarette lighter / power power outlet can cause fire. Do not system, do not connect any gener-
leave a child alone in the vehicle. ating equipment to the power outlet.
outlet • If you finish, immediately put the • Use only the electrical equipment
lighter back to its original position. in line with the national electromag-
Do not place it at will. netic compatibility norms.
• Avoid damage to the electrical
equipment connected to the power
outlet due to voltage fluctuation. Be
sure to turn off the electrical equip-
ment when turning on/off the igni-
tion switch or start switch.

OMA28-0068

- With the ignition switch or start switch in


Position "ON" or "ACC", press in the cig-
arette lighter. When the cigarette lighter
automatically pops up, you can pull out
it.
- To use the power socket, you can re-
move the cigarette lighter.

112

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 112 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.7 Trunk Trunk warning sign Spare tire / Tools in Trunk

To ensure the vehicle handling and stability,


observe the following precautions when loading
items:
- Place them as far evenly as possible.
- Place them as far forward as possible.

1
2
1

OMA28-0118 OMA28-0110

- After trunk lid was opened, and then - Raise the trunk carpet, and you can see
warning sign -1- in the trunk lid. the spare tire -1- and the driver’s tools
-2-.

113

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 113 2016/7/11 16:04:42


2. Operating System and Equipment

Trunk capacity
Note Warning
To take the spare tire, remove the whole The scattered belongings or other items
trunk carpet first. To avoid personal injury in the vehicle may cause serious injury.
due to overweight, have another person • While driving, the items scattered
help you to remove it. in the trunk may slide suddenly,
resulting in change in the vehicle
handling and stability.
• The items in the passenger com-
partment can fly forward and injure
you or your passengers if you brake
hard or are involved in a collision.
• The heavy loaded in the trunk must
be secured with fastening straps.
Bear in mind: carrying heavy goods OMA28-0069
may cause the change of car's cen-
ter gravity and operation stability.
- Turn forward and lay down rear seat
(please refer to P106).
- Hold two ends of trunk curtain and press
it in arrow direction to remove the trunk
curtain and enlarge trunk space.

114

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 114 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

Trunk shield
Note
• When folding the curtain, never let
itself to fold; otherwise it may dam-
age trunk curtain. You must use
your hands to help it to fold.
• Please don't place heavy articles on
trunk curtain, to avoid damage of
trunk curtain.

1 2
OMA28-0070

- Pull out trunk curtain in arrow direction


and fix it inside trunk slot -1- and -2- to
shield all luggages inside trunk.

115

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 115 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.4.8 Accessories and modi- Warning


Before installing any accessory:

fications 1. Make sure the accessory does not ob-


scure any lights, or interfere with proper
Improper accessories or modifications vehicle operation or performance.
The data labels and signboards attached to the can affect your vehicle’s handling, stabil-
factory fuel tank cap, engine hood lock rack ity, and performance, and cause a crash in 2. Do not install accessories on the B-pillars
and other auto parts contains important data which you can be hurt or killed. or across the rear windows. Accessories
and information on vehicle operation. Do not installed in these areas may interfere
remove or damage such labels and signboards. When properly installed, cellular phones, with proper operation of the side curtain
Always keep the data and information on the alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered airbags.
labels and signboards clear and readable. audio systems should not interfere with your
vehicle’s computer controlled systems. Such as
This vehicle is designed with the latest safety Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
technique to ensure excellent active safety and
passive safety. Therefore, to maintain the vehi-
cle’s excellent characteristics, before you make
any modifications or add any accessories, be
sure to consult your dealer.
We recommend you always use the accesso-
ries and parts which have been designed and
approved for your vehicle. We are not respon-
sible for any part not manufactured by us.

116

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 116 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

Modifying Your Vehicle • Do not install non-GAC Motor


Warning
Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing wheels and tires.
components with non-GAC Motor Trumpchi • Improper accessories or modifica- • Modifying the front of the vehicle
components could seriously affect your ve- tions can affect your vehicle’s han- and the engine compartment can
hicle’s handling, stability, and reliability. Such dling, stability, and performance, deteriorate pedestrian protection
as the following: and cause a crash in which you can performance of the vehicle and vio-
be hurt or killed. We recommend late the road regulations.
• Larger or smaller wheels and tires can you always use the approved acces-
interfere with the operation of your vehi- sories and spare parts with strictly-
cle’s anti-lock brakes and other systems. verified adaptability, reliability and
• Modifying your steering wheel or any safety.
other part of your vehicle’s safety fea- • Improper maintenance or modifica-
tures can make the systems ineffective. tions can weaken the protection
from airbags, cause the system
failure and fatal accidents Do not
install or connect the beverage cup
holder, phone holder and other ac-
cessories onto the cover of airbag
module or in the range of action of
airbags.
• Improper operation or modifications
(modification of the engine, brake
system, running system or compo-
nents affecting the performance of
the wheels and tires) can affect the
function of the airbag system, re-
sulting in serious injury or death.

117

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 117 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.5 A/C system Warning Hint


2.5.1 Overview • Activate the Recirculation Mode • When the outside temperature and
humidity are high, moisture in the
as needed. Deactivate it when not
needed. air will condense on the evaporator
The A/C filters can remove the pollen and dust of the refrigeration system, result-
brought-in by the heating and air-conditioning • Blurred windows easily increase the ing in water droplets dripping from
system from the outside. risk of accidents and casualties. For the evaporator which form water un-
the sake of safety, all the windows der the vehicle. This is normal, and
Be sure to replace the A/C filters at scheduled must be free of ice, snow and fog to
maintenance. there is no need to fear.
ensure clear vision.
• The air inlet in the front of the front
See the Maintenance Schedule in the Warranty • Turbid air in the vehicle will cause windshield should be unblocked,
Booklet. the driver to be fatigued, depressed and make sure it is not clogged by
and distracted, resulting in acci- snow, ice and leaves. Make sure
Shorten the replacement interval of the A/C dents and casualties. the heating and cooling are normal.
filters if you often drive in the urban area with Prevent the front windshield from
heavy smoke caused by factories and diesel- fogging up.
powered vehicles. Try to replace the A/C filter
as soon as possible if the air flow from the Note • All the windows and the moonroof
heating and cooling system is not smooth as must be closed for the air condition-
usual. ing system to play a maximum ef-
• The expertise and special tools are fect. If the vehicle has been exposed
essential to the diagnosis and repair to the burning sun and it is very hot
of air conditioning systems. There- in the vehicle, you should briefly
fore, if your air conditioning system open the windows to dissipate the
fails or is suspected, be sure to go heat and accelerate cooling.
to your authorized GAC Motor deal-
er to have it checked.

118

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 118 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.5.2 Automatic air conditioning system (applicable to some


models)
1. OFF key: used to turn off A/C system.
2. Temperature UP key: used to raise the
temperature required in the vehicle.
3. Air volume UP key: used to raise air
blower speed manually.
1 2 3 4 4. MODE button, used to change the air
outlets. The selected mode will be shown
on the display.
5. Windshield defrosting key: open or close
front windshield defrosting / fog function.
6. Air volume DOWN key: used to reduce
MODE
air blower speed.
OFF TEMP

AUTO 7. Inner cycle button: turn on /off the Recir-


culation mode
A/C TEMP

8. Rear windshield defroster/mirror defrost-


er.
9. AUTO button, used to set the air condi-
tioning system in automatic adjustment
mode.
10. Temperature DOWN key: used to reduce
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 the temperature required inside the ve-
hicle.
11. A/C switch used to turn on air-condition-
ing refrigeration system.
OMA28-0034

119

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 119 2016/7/11 16:04:43


2. Operating System and Equipment

Shutdown Mode Temperature setting Air distribution

- If the OFF switch is pressed, the air


OFF The temperature inside the vehicle can be set Pressing this switch MODE
controls the interior
conditioning system enters the shutdown by temperature UP key TEMP
and temperature air distribution status.
mode. DOWN key TEMP
. This temperature value is Manual selection:
- In shutdown mode, A/C is turned off, so displayed on DVD display and the temperature
can be adjusted between 18℃ ~32℃ . Step for In manual mode, you can select four types of
that the air volume is zero. air outlet patterns in the following order:
temperature regulation is 0.5 ℃ . When setting
- In shutdown mode, you can operate ef- temperature is 18℃
: Air flows from air vent on instrument
fectively , and without starting up.
MODE

In automatic mode, to obtain the most ideal panel.


Operating the temperature knob interior temperature, we recommend the set
: Air flow is divided between the vents in
TEMP TEMP

is ineffective. temperature of 25.0 ℃ . If necessary, you can


adjust the temperature by yourself. the instrument panel and the floor vents.
- In shutdown mode, open A/C system : Air flows from air vent around foot.
again by A/C , AUTO , and
AUTO

Note
A/C

(air volume key). : Air flows is divided into two parts: air
vent around foot and air vent of front
The temperature displayed on the control- windshield defroster.
ler display screen is the target value of the
set temperature instead of the measured All of the above states can be selected cycli-
value of the interior temperature. cally in the order.

120

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 120 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

Automatic control: Windshield defrosting


Note
In automatic mode, the air outlet mode is part
of the automatic control logic. The air outlet Pressing the switch turns on/off the wind-
mode is automatically selected by the control- shield defroster and the front-side window de- When the temperature control is set at
ler. When operating MODE, the system will froster. the coldest position, using the defrosting
switch to manual mode from automatic mode. function can cause windshield outside
The basic factor having an influence on the air If the defrosting function is enabled through the fogging up and impact on driving sight,
outlet mode is the outlet air temperature. When switch, the following will be performed auto- resulting in accidents. When the defrost-
the outlet air temperature is high, the air flows matically: ing function is used, the temperature will
mainly to the feet. When the outlet air tempera- be set to HOT or WARM position.
• Outlet air temperature rise;
ture is low, the air flows mainly to the upper
body. • Starting of compressor (A/C);
• Air flows to the windshield;
Note • Select Fresh Air for air circulation. In
the process of defrosting, operating this
• To ensure optimal air distribution switch again
results, make sure each air outlet in
the vehicle is open. will end the defrosting operation and return to
the state before defrosting operation; or press-
• In winter cold-start mode, auto ing AUTO switch to directly enter the automatic
mode will transfer gradually starting control state may also terminate defrosting op-
from blowing front window mode. eration.
Indicator light for windshield defroster switch
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi-
cates that defrosting is in progress.
- When the indicator light goes out, this
indicates that defrosting function is not
enabled.

121

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 121 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

Air volume setting Air circulation


Note
Air volume adjustment can set air blower Pressing this switch controls the interior air
speed by air volume UP and air volume inflow status. • Prolonged recirculation can cause
Down key manually. In automatic mode, carbon dioxide accumulation in the
• Recirculation function can prevent the air vehicle, and this is not conducive to
the fan speed will be controlled by the system outside from entering the vehicle, thus keeping the driver awake.
automatically. Operating the air volume control allowing the inside air to circulate;
knob will cause the system state to change to • Using in cold or rainy weather can
manual mode from automatic mode. The AUTO • This feature can prevent the exhaust of cause windshield fogging up and
icon disappears. other vehicles or other dirty air from en- impact on driving sight, resulting in
tering your vehicle. accidents.
Manual setting:
• When in auto control mode in Summer,
In manual state, the customer can set air the system uses Recirculation to opti-
volume by air volume UP key and air volume mize cooling effects.
DOWN key. Air volume is level 1-7.
Air circulation switch indicator light
Automatic setting:
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi-
In automatic mode, the fan speed is part of the cates that the Recirculation Mode is acti-
automatic control logic. The fan speed is lim- vated.
ited to 7 levels in manual mode. But the DVD
displays only 7 strips. Therefore, so the number - When the indicator light goes out, this
of indicator strips displayed is the immediate indicates that the Fresh-Air Mode is acti-
fan speed. To allow the interior temperature to vated.
reach the target, the fan speed can be adjusted
automatically.

122

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 122 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

Rear Windshield defroster Automatic mode Sunlight/temperature sensor

Pressing this switch activates / deactivates the Full-automatic A/C control system can measure
If the AUTO switch is pressed, the air con-
AUTO
the temperature and sunshine inside and out-
rear windshield defroster.
ditioning system enters the full auto operation side the vehicle. During the course of driving,
During rear defrosting, DVD displays the ap- mode. The following functions will be controlled do not block the sensor.
propriate icon. You can press the button again automatically based on the set temperature:
to de-activate the rear defrosting function.
Otherwise, the rear defrosting function will • Outlet air temperature; Note
continue to operate for 15 minutes and then be
shut down automatically. • Air output inside the vehicle.
Due to different environment areas and
Indicator light for rear windshield defroster • Changing air outlets; vehicle conditions, the ambient tempera-
ture may be displayed differently from the
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi- • Select for air circulation; actual value.
cates that the rear windshield defroster • Operation of compressor (A/C);
is activated.
• Operation of negative ion purifier.
- When the indicator light goes out, this in-
dicates that the rear windshield defroster AUTO switch indicator light
is not enabled.
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi-
cates that the system is in the fully auto-
Note matic operation mode.
- When the indicator light goes out, this
Without starting the engine, prolonged indicates that the system is not in fully
use of the rear defrosting function may automatic operation mode.
cause low battery voltage, resulting in fail-
ure to start the vehicle.

123

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 123 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

A/C switch
Pressing the A/C switch turns on/off the air
conditioning refrigeration.
- When the outside temperature is below
0 ℃ , if the air-conditioning refrigeration
is started, the indicator light is lit, but the
compressor may be unable to work.
A/C switch indicator lamp
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi-
cates that refrigeration (dehumidification)
is needed (the compressor may not be
activated.).
- When the indicator light goes out, this
indicates that no refrigeration (dehumidi-
fication) is needed (the compressor must
be turned off.).

124

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 124 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.5.3 Manual air conditioning system (applicable to some


models)
1. OFF key: used to turn off A/C system.
2. Temperature UP key: used to raise the
temperature required in the vehicle.
3. Air volume UP key: used to raise air
blower speed manually.
1 2 3 4 4. MODE button, used to change the air
outlets. The selected mode will be shown
on the display.
5. Windshield defrosting key: open or close
front windshield defrosting / fog function.
6. Air volume DOWN key: used to reduce
MODE
air blower speed.
OFF TEMP

7. Inner cycle button: turn on /off the Recir-


culation mode
A/C TEMP

8. Rear window defrosting /rearview mirror


defrosting (applicable to some models).
9. Temperature DOWN key: used to reduce
the temperature required inside the ve-
hicle.
10. A/C switch used to turn on air-condition-
10 9 8 7 6 5 ing refrigeration system.

OMA28-0094

125

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 125 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

Shutdown Mode Temperature setting Air volume setting


If the OFF switch is pressed, the air condition- The temperature can be set by temperature UP Air blower speed can be set by air volume UP
ing system enters the shutdown mode. key and temperature DOWN key. This tempera- key and air volume DOWN key manually.
ture value is displayed on LCD and can be ad-
- In shutdown mode, A/C is turned off, so justed within 18℃ ~32℃ . Step for temperature In manual state, the customer can set air
that the air volume is zero. regulation is 0.5 ℃ . With the set temperature volume by air volume UP key and air volume
of 18 ℃ , LCD displays L0. With the set tem- DOWN key. Air volume is level 1~7.
- In shutdown mode, you can operate ef-
perature of 32℃ , HI is displayed. Temperature
fectively , and without starting up. settings do not change the operation mode of
Operating the temperature knob is inef- the air conditioning system. In automatic mode,
fective. when entering LO/HI, the system will keep op-
- In shutdown mode, open A/C system erating in the large air supply state.
again by A/C , AUTO ,
MODE A/C

and (air volume key).

126

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 126 2016/7/11 16:04:44


2. Operating System and Equipment

Air distribution Windshield defrosting


Note
Pressing this switch controls the interior air dis- Pressing the switch turns on/off the windshield
tribution status. You can select one of four air defroster and the front-side window defroster. When the temperature control is set at
outlet modes in the following order: the coldest position, using the defrosting
If the defrosting function is enabled through the function can cause windshield outside
: Air flows from air vent on instrument switch, the following will be performed auto- fogging up and impact on driving sight,
panel. matically: resulting in accidents. When the defrost-
• Starting of compressor (A/C); ing function is used, the temperature will
: Air flow is divided between the vents in be set to HOT or WARM position.
the instrument panel and the floor vents. • Air flows to the windshield;
: Air flows from air vent around foot. • Select Fresh Air for air circulation. In
the process of defrosting, operating this
: Air flows is divided into two parts: air switch again
vent around foot and air vent of front
windshield defroster. During the course of defrosting, press this
switch again, and the defrosting is over, and it
All of the above states can be selected cycli- restores to the state before defrosting;
cally in the order.
Indicator light for windshield defroster switch

Note - When the indicator light is lit, this indi-


cates that defrosting is in progress.
To ensure optimal air distribution effects, - When the indicator light goes out, this
make sure each air outlet is open. indicates that defrosting function is not
enabled.

127

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 127 2016/7/11 16:04:45


2. Operating System and Equipment

• Air circulation; Rear Windshield defroster A/C switch


Pressing this switch controls the interior air Pressing this switch activates / deactivates the Pressing the A/C switch turns on/off the air
rear windshield defroster. conditioning refrigeration.
inflow status.
During rear defrosting, LCD displays the appro- A/C switch indicator lamp
Recirculation can prevent the air outside from priate icon. You can press the button again to
entering your vehicle, thus allowing the inside de-activate the rear defrosting function. Other- - When the indicator light is lit, this indi-
air to circulate. This feature prevents the ex- wise, the rear defrosting function will continue cates that refrigeration (dehumidification)
haust from other vehicles or other dirty air from to operate for 15 minutes and then be shut is needed (the compressor may not be
entering your vehicle. down automatically. activated.).
Air circulation switch indicator light Indicator light for rear windshield defroster - When the indicator light goes out, this
indicates that no refrigeration (dehumidi-
- When the indicator light is lit, this indi- - When the indicator light is lit, this indi- fication) is needed (the compressor must
cates that the Fresh-Air Mode is acti- cates that the rear windshield defroster be turned off.).
vated. is activated.
- When the indicator light goes out, this - When the indicator light goes out, this in-
indicates that the Fresh-Air Mode is acti- dicates that the rear windshield defroster
vated. is not enabled.

Note Note
• Prolonged recirculation can cause Without starting the engine, prolonged
carbon dioxide accumulation in the use of the rear defrosting function may
vehicle, and this is not conducive to cause low battery voltage, resulting in fail-
keeping the driver awake. ure to start the vehicle.
• Using in cold or rainy weather can
cause windshield fogging up and
impact on driving sight, resulting in
accidents.

128

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 128 2016/7/11 16:04:45


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6 Sound system (radio) (applicable to some


models)
1. Auto Store and Preset Store Scan But-
ton
- Briefly pressing the switch searches for
the stored radio stations. It will take 10s
to search for each preset station. Press-
ing and holding the switch performs auto
search and stores the effective stations.
2. Power ON/OFF /Volume adjusting knob

1 2 3 4 5 6 1
7 - In OFF mode, press briefly Power ON
to start up. In ON mode, press briefly
Power OFF to shut down and turn off
all sound sources, displaying the clock
interface.

VOL TUNE
- Turning the Volume adjusting knob
APS
AM/FM SET clockwise increases volume, and turning
SEL counter-clockwise decreases volume.
1 2 3 MODE 5 6 SCAN
3. AM/FM button
DISP 4

- In other sound sources, briefly press the


button to switch to FM/AM.
- Short pressed into switching under the
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8
9 8 reception status: FM1 →FM2 → FM3→
AM1 → AM2 band radio
4. Radio Frequency Adjustment, Previous
Track
- In the radio interface, press briefly the
button to search for effective radios to-
OMA28-0091 ward high frequency.

129

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 129 2016/7/11 16:04:45


2. Operating System and Equipment

- In the radio interface, press and hold the 8. SCAN button 13. Preset Station 3 and Previous Folder
button to search for effective radios to- button
ward high frequency manually. - In the radio interface, briefly press the
button to search for effective radios to- - In the radio interface, play Preset Station
- In the music player interface, press brief- ward high-frequency automatically. 3.
ly the button to go to the previous track.
- In USB interface, briefly press SCAN to - In USB player interface, to return to the
- In playback interface, press and hold is scan the whole disc, and press and hold previous folder, press briefly RETURN.
fast backward. SCAN to scan the folder. Each tune will
play for 10 seconds. 14. Preset Station 2 and Shuttle Play button
5. Radio Frequency Adjustment, Next Track
- Briefly press MUTE button to mute, and - In the radio interface, play Preset Station
- In the radio interface, press briefly the briefly press it again to unmute. 2.
button to search for effective radios to-
ward high frequency. 9. Preset Station 6 - In CD / USB music player interface,
press briefly the button for shuffle play
- In the radio interface, press and hold the - In the radio interface, play Preset Station of all files, and press and hold the but-
button to search for effective radios to- 6. ton for shuffle play of all files within the
ward high frequency manually. folder.
10. Preset Station 5
- In the music player interface, press brief- 15. Preset Station 1 and Loop Play button
ly the button to go to the next track. - In the radio interface, play Preset Station
5. - In the radio interface, play Preset Station
- In playback interface, press and hold is 1.
fast forward. 11. Preset Station 4 and Next Folder button
- In USB music player interface, briefly
6. Station frequency adjustment / SEL - In the radio interface, play Preset Station press the Loop Play button for file loop
4. play, and press and hold the Loop Play
- In the radio interface, turn the knob left- button for folder loop playback.
ward and rightward to adjust the radio - In USB player interface, to go to next
frequency, and briefly press SEL to con- folder, press briefly ENTER. 16. MUTE button
firm the selection. 12. Select button of sound source
7. Menu set button - Briefly pressing the button switches
- Briefly pressing on the button enters the among RADIO, USB and AUX IN.
setup menu interface.

130

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 130 2016/7/11 16:04:45


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.1 Basic Operations Volume control Partial graph for A/C as shown:

Adjusting the volume


ON/OFF
- When the ignition switch is in Position
ACC or ON, press briefly to turn on Volume
the audio equipment.
- In power-on mode, pressing briefly the
middle button on the knob powers off
and turns off all sound sources, display- - Turning the left knob clockwise increases
ing the clock interface. volume.
- Turning the left knob counterclockwise
rotation decreases volume.

Note
In the volume adjustment interface, if you
do not operate within 2 seconds, it auto-
matically returns to the player interface.
Volume setting range (0-35).

131

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 131 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

MUTE System Setting Equalizer setting (EQ)

Sound effect
Set
Rock
Sound effect
Straightness Rock Popular Playhouse Individuality
Individuality

- Briefly pressing MUTE activates the - Briefly pressing SET button enters the - EQ mode produces different sound ef-
mute function. Interface displays MUTE setting interface to set "SOUND", "CUS- fects and gives you more music enjoy-
icon. TOM", "RIGHT LEFT " balance , "REAR ment. Four options, i.e., FLAT, ROCK,
FRONT" balance, " SDVC", "CLOCK", POP, VOCAL and USER, are available.
ST
"LANGUAGE", "VEHICLE SETTING", You can briefly press SEL to confirm the
" RESTORE FACTORY SETTING" and selection.
"EXIT".
- To set the menu, turn SEL to select dif-
ferent menu items and briefly press SEL
to confirm the selection.
- Briefly pressing MUTE again deactivates
the mute function.

Hint
For your driving safety, keep an appropri-
ate volume, so you can fully understand
the road and traffic situations

132

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 132 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

Custom setting (CUSTOM) Bass setting TREBLE setting

Set Set Set

Low pitch Low pitch High pitch


High pitch

- In custom setting, there are two options - BASS setting is shown in the figure. If - TREBLE setting is shown in the figure. If
(i.e., BASS and TREBLE ). You can cus- BASS is selected, briefly press "SEL" TREBLE is selected, briefly press "SEL"
tomize the bass and treble setting. to enter the BASS setting interface for to enter the TREBLE setting interface
"BASS Setting." Setting range: -12 ~12. for "TREBLE Setting." Setting range: -12
If you finish, short press the SEL button ~12. If you finish, briefly press the SEL
to confirm. button to confirm.

133

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 133 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

BALANCE Setting FADER Setting SDVC Setting

Set Set Set

L/R Front Front and rear Front Speed compensated volume Height

Front Rear Front Rear OFF Low Middle Height

- Select BALANCE and briefly press "SEL" - Select FADER, and click on "SEL" to - Select SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
to enter the BALANCE setting interface. enter FADER setting interface to adjust Control), and then briefly press "SEL" to
You can adjust the sound output location the sound output location. Setting range enter SDVC setting interface. Setting op-
through "BALANCE SETTING". Setting of front 15 to rear 15. If you finish, short tions include OFF, LOW, MID and HIGH.
range of left 15 to right15. If you finish, press the SEL button to confirm. If you finish, short press the SEL button
short press the SEL button to confirm. to confirm.

134

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 134 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

- After the SDVC curve setting is selected, CLOCK Setting Language setup
the output volume is automatically ad-
justed with the speed change. SDVC
speed state table is as follows: Clock Set

Language model In Chinese


State Volume change In Chinese English

The volume does not


OFF(off ) change with the vehicle
speed. - Select CLOCK, and click on "SEL" to - Select LANGUAGE SETUP, and click on
enter CLOCK setting interface for "Host "SEL" to enter LANGUAGE SETUP in-
Time Setting." terface to do "LANGUAGE SETUP". You
The volume changes with can set display in Chinese or English.
LOW (low) the vehicle speed, small - To adjust the time, turn the "SEL" button.
change If you finish, short press the "SEL" button - Turn the knob to left and right to select
to confirm. Chinese or English. If you finish, click on
The volume changes with "SEL" button to confirm the setting.
MID (middle) the vehicle speed, middle
change

The volume changes with


HIGH (high) the vehicle speed, large
change

135

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 135 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

Restore FACTORY SETTING. EXIT setting

Set Set

Restore the factory settings Restore the factory settings

Exit Exit

- Turn the right knob to select "FACTORY - Select EXIT and then briefly press the
SETTING ", and then click on "SEL" to SEL button to exit the system setting
enter "FACTORY SETTING". menu.

Set

Restore the factory settings Cancelling

OK Cancelling

- You can select "OK" or "CANCEL". Turn


the right knob to select and click on
"SEL" to confirm. Then, restore all FAC-
TORY SETTINGS.

136

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 136 2016/7/11 16:04:46


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.2 Radio Radio search function


Tune radio stations manually or automatically.
Band selection
Manual search
There are two ways to enter the radio playback
interface: - Press and hold to search toward
high frequency.
- Clicking on MODE on the panel switches
to RADIO play; - FM interface is shown in the figure.
- Press and hold to search toward
- To enter radio mode, briefly press FM/ ST low frequency. Auto searching
AM on the panel;
- Clicking on begins to search for a
high-frequency radio automatically. The
system stops the automatic search if an
Radio effective radio station is detected, and
starts broadcasting.
- AM interface is shown in the figure. - Briefly pressing , the radio will
search for a low-frequency automatically.
The system stops the automatic search if
- In the radio interface, click on FM/AM an effective radio station is detected, and
continuously to switch among FM1→ starts broadcasting.
FM2→FM3→AM1→AM2→FM1.

137

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 137 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

Pre-stored radio stations Manual Store Auto Store

You can store your favorite stations in the sta- Find your favorite radio station through auto- - Press and hold the APS button to enter
tion list. Each band can provide manual and matic or manual search. the Auto Store interface. Once a valid
automatic storage lists. Each list contains 6 station is searched, it will be automati-
- Long press the preset button below cally stored to the preset key. During
radio stations at most. FM band can store 18 the display for over 2s. The frequency
broadcasting stations at most, in which FM1, channel search, press FM/AM to stop
flashes on the display while displaying search. When you use the Auto Store
FM2, and FM3 store 6 stations, respectively; the frequency position at the correspond-
AM can store 12 stations at most, in which AM1 feature, the originally stored stations on
ing preset key. The current station will be the band will be overwritten.
and AM2 store 6 stations, respectively. successfully stored to the preset key.
- Clicking on APS can search the stored
- If a radio station has been stored in the preset radio stations. It will take 10 sec-
key, the new one will overwrite the origi- onds to search each radio station.
nal one.

- As shown in the figure, If Button 3 3


is pressed, the searched 108.0 radio
station will be stored in the position of
Preset Radio 3. Operate other preset
stations in the same way.
- To play a preset station, just press the
corresponding preset key.

138

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 138 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

Scan function AM/FM car stereo reception form

Broadcasting station
Electrical layer

FM electric wave AM reflected wave


Mountain

- If you short press the SCAN button, the Reflected wave


display will show the SCAN icon. Then,
the radio will search the station toward FM electric wave
high frequency from the current fre- Building
quency, and play the valid station for 10 Iron bridge
seconds and then continue to search for
the next valid station. Separation district ( weak electric field) OMA28-0200
OMA28-0199

- VHF channels on FM pass through the - The radio is far away the broadcasting
ionosphere directly without reflection, but station, so the signals are too weak to be
once they hit high mountains and high- received. As a result, the radio will only
rise buildings and other barriers, they will receive noises.
produce reflections. - When the vehicle driving through the
- FM propagation distance is usually about area with two strong stations with a
- In the process of scanning and playing, 40~50 km. When stereo signals emit, the similar signal frequency which can be
if your favorite station is playing, short propagation distance will be shorter. received, the radio may lose sound sud-
press this button again to cancel the denly or produce noise interference.
scan function (SCAN icon disappears)
and continue playing the station.

139

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 139 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

Electrical layer
reflected wave

AM
Broadcasting
station
Broadcasting
station 2
Emitted
frequency

Broadcasting station 1

OMA28-0201

• Although the medium wave or short


wave in AM can't penetrate ionosphere,
they can produce diffraction. Therefore,
when the wave counters high hill or
building, its broadcasting distance is far-
ther than FM. This advantage make the
radio have access to two AM stations at
the same time.

140

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 140 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.3 USB play


Precautions for USB Play (Please read the following carefully before playing USB):
• If you have already started the engine, be careful to keep the connection status of the connected USB device. Starting the engine with the USB
device connected can cause the USB device damage.
• When you start or shut off the engine with the USB device connected, the USB device may have no response.
• The file format other than MP3, WMA and other standard formats may not be played.
• When MP3 document compression ratio is 8 Kbps~320 Kbps, MP3 can played. When WMA document compression ratio is 8 Kbps~320 Kbps,
WMA document can played
• When a USB device is connected, it may not be recognized due to its state sometimes.
• Only FAT 6/32 files can be read by the USB device.
• The USB device may not be used in your vehicle due to compatibility problems. Therefore, be sure to check it for compatibility before playing.
• Prevent your body or other object from touching the connection of the USB device.
• Connecting or disconnecting the USB device repeatedly in a short time can cause damage to the USB device.
• Pulling out the USB device suddenly when its files are being played can cause damage to the USB device or abnormality. Therefore, turn off
the audio system before pulling out the USB device, or pull out it in other mode.
• Recognizing the connection of the USB device depends on its type, memory or files.
• Heating caused by charging with the USB port may reduce the product performance or cause a trouble.
• General USB HUB or extension cable can cause the USB device cannot be recognized. Therefore, connect the USB device to the USB port
directly.

141

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 141 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

• When the MP3 PLAYER, mobile phone or digital camera is connected, if the removable drive cannot be recognized, this may be because the
host cannot operate normally.
• Maybe it does not recognize SD Type USB memory stick or CF Type USB memory stick and other devices connecting with adapter and using
USB.
• The USB device may be connected poorly due to vehicle vibration.
• When USB audio playing, do not pull out the USB immediately. Doing so may cause damage to the USB.

142

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 142 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

Selection of USB source

Without USB
There are the following two ways to enter the - If no USB device is inserted, the screen
main interface of the USB media source: shown in the figure appears.
- If you insert the USB device into the
USB slot, the system will switch to the
main interface of the USB media source
OMA28-0158
automatically. Loading.......
- In other media source, if you press the
- As shown in the figure, the position for MODE button, the system will switch
the USB interface is at the arrow. to the main interface of the USB media
source. - If a USB device is inserted, a screen will
be shown in the figure.

143

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 143 2016/7/11 16:04:47


2. Operating System and Equipment

USB music player Previous Track/Fast Backward


- Briefly press to go to the previous
track.

USB error - Long press the button to move the


current track rapidly backward (to the
beginning of the current track for normal
play. To stop moving to the beginning of
the current track, release the button and
- When the USB device cannot read, the resume normal play) .
screen will be shown in the figure.

144

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 144 2016/7/11 16:04:48


2. Operating System and Equipment

Next Track/Fast Forward Loop play Shuffle play


- Short press the button to skip for-
ward to the next track.
- Long press the button to move the
track rapidly forward. The track will start
playing normally when you release the
button. If you move the track rapidly for-
ward to its end, the system will start play-
ing normally from the next track. If the - Short press 1 the button to achieve - Short press the button 2 to achieve
track is the last one of the current folder, loop play of a single track. random play of the entire disc.
the system will start playing normally
from the first track of the next folder.

- Long press the button 1 to achieve - Long press the button 2 to achieve
loop play of a folder. random play of a folder.

145

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 145 2016/7/11 16:04:49


2. Operating System and Equipment

Scan function

Hint
When playing USB music, briefly press
3 to return to the previous file and brief-
ly press 4 to go into the next file.

- Briefly press SCAN key and USB music


will scan songs automatically. Switch to
next song 10s after scanning and playing
automatically.

- Long press SCAN key to scan songs au-


tomatically in current playing file of USB
music. Switch to next song 10s after
scanning and playing automatically.

146

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 146 2016/7/11 16:04:49


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.4 AUX IN playing AUXI AUDIO

You can choose AUX IN to play audio.

If your portable device is connected to this unit


via special adapter harness, you can turn on
the portable device to play music and enter the
AUX play mode in the following two ways:
- When the device is inserted, the system
will automatically enter the AUX IN play
OMA28-0202
mode.

- Support a variety of audio devices with - With the machine turned on, shortly
OMA28-0159 press the MODE button on the panel to
3.5mmstandard output interface (5 m).
switch to AUX IN audio play.
- As shown in the figure, the Arrow indi-
cates the position for the AUX IN inter-
face.

147

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 147 2016/7/11 16:04:49


2. Operating System and Equipment

Without AUX

- In AUX IN mode, you can adjust sound - When the AUX IN device is not connect-
volume by turning the knob on the left. ed, the screen is shown in the figure.
- To exit AUX IN audio player, manually
exit AUX IN sound source and switch to
other source.
AUX IN

- When the AUX IN device is not connect-


ed, the screen is shown in the figure.

148

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 148 2016/7/11 16:04:49


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.5 Playing an iPod iPod source selection


Hint
There are the following two ways to enter the
This product has been certified by the Apple main interface of the iPod media source: iPod can play music. The function and
iPod, supporting iPod and iPhone professional operating method are the same as that
equipment to play iPod and iPhone music. iPod of USB music. Please refer to operating
and iPhone devices are connected to the audio method of USB music.
host via USB harnesses.

- If iPod is inserted in the USB slot, the


main interface of iPod media source acti-
vates automatically.
- In other media sources, press MODE to
switch to the iPod main interface.

149

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 149 2016/7/11 16:04:49


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.6 Precautions Warning Note


The GAC MOTOR audio system is designed
and manufactured in accordance with the strict • When the vehicle is running, try to • When the vehicle is running, adjust
internal quality standards and international minimize the time to check the au- the music volume to the extent that
quality standards. Quality tests include impact- dio interface. Failure to do so may you can hear the sound outside. If
resistant test, anti-dust test, shock resistance cause an accident. you cannot hear outside sounds,
test, weather resistance test and other. • Do not dismantle or modify the this may cause an accident.
product. This can cause product • Use it only when your vehicle is
We hope you enjoy music and life through this malfunction, fire, electric shock and started. With the engine shutdown,
product to meet your entertainment needs. We other problem. prolonged use can cause loss of
hope to give you complete and reliable informa- battery power.
tion. This manual will introduce its functionality • Avoid inflow of water or debris. This
to you for ease and convenience of use. Fail- will result in sparking, fault, smoke • Avoid impact on the product. If
ure to follow the warnings and precautions can and other. pressurized directly, LCD and touch
cause damage or faults which are not covered • Do not use it when any screen or screen can be damaged.
by the Warranty. Therefore, we recommend play failure occurs. Doing so can • To clean the screen, power off and
you take time to study this manual before driv- cause the product malfunction, fire, then wipe it off with a dry cloth. Do
ing your vehicle. electric shock and other problem. not use hard cloth or chemical rag
• Do not touch the antenna when and organic solvents (benzene, eth-
thundering. Doing so can cause anol, paint thinner, etc.). Doing so
electric shock due to lightning. can cause scarring or deterioration.
• Only operate the system in a park- • Do not touch the screen with any
ing area. Failure to do can cause ac- sharp tool (e.g., awls, nail). Doing so
cidents. can cause damage to the product.

150

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 150 2016/7/11 16:04:50


2. Operating System and Equipment

Note Hint
• If the system fails and cannot be • For the purpose of this Manual,
used normally, please stop the ve- "CLICK ON" means it takes time no
hicle and contact service station more than 2 seconds, and "PRESS"
authorized by GAC. means it takes time more than 1.2
seconds. All are referred to as "Click
• In the event of abnormal operation, on" and "Press" in this manual.
continuous operating can cause
more serious problems. Any dis-
mantling or modification of the
product without permission is not
covered by the Warranty.

151

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 151 2016/7/11 16:04:50


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.7 Features and Specifications

Function Item Specifications

AM Reception Frequency 531~1602 kHz


Radio
FM Reception Frequency 87.5~108MHz

Frequency Range 0Hz~20KHz

SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) 75dB(MP3)


Audio
Frequency characteristics +,-3dB

Number of Channels Left and right stereo

Antenna Signal receiving mode (antenna) External Antenna

Power supply DC 9~16.0V,≤10A

Using temperature -20~70℃


Operating temperature
Storage temperature -30~85℃

Interface USB 2.0(Host), AUX IN

File System FAT 16/32 File System

File play specifications Supported audio file formats: MP3, WMA.

152

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 152 2016/7/11 16:04:50


2. Operating System and Equipment

2.6.8 Check before maintenance


When you feel certain audio function fails, before going to your dealer, take time to study the instructions and check based on the following table, and
this helps you remove the fault. If the fault still exists, go to your GAC MOTOR dealer for inspection and maintenance. Do not disassemble the unit or
repair it by yourself.

Symptom Potential Causes and Actions

Remove the host from the dashboard, and check the host and the fuse
Host has no operation and no display. and connector.

Increase the volume.

Host operates but little or no sound. Check the BALANCE and FADER settings.

Check the antenna and connector.

Gentle heating of host body Radio-cassette player generates heat when operating properly.

Check that the antenna is fully extended and the connection is correct.

Radio reception is poor. Check thin-vehicle antenna amplifier for damage.

The signal of the desired station is weak, tune it manually.

We recommend you replace the U disk and do troubleshooting diagno-


USB cannot read sis.

Make sure that the file is a MP3 or WMA file. This unit cannot support
There are audio files which cannot play. any audio file format other than MP3 and WMA.

153

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 153 2016/7/11 16:04:50


2. Operating System and Equipment

Symptom Potential Causes and Actions

Because the sources of songs in MP3 format are extensive and have
Volume fluctuates when playing MP3. no unified standard, the set volume could be different in size when the
songs in MP3 format are compressed.

This may be caused by the different format in which the songs are com-
Music pauses intermittently when playing. pressed.

Be sure to check the memory’s partitioned mode is the single partition


The media files in storage device cannot be read. FAT 16/32. If not, you can re-set the partitioned mode to the standard
required by this unit.

MP3 cannot be read from all-in-one USB adapter. The unit supports only the adapter with a single USB port.

This may be caused by the device or noise when recording the original
Sonic boom /Noise MP3 files. Try to use other players to check whether there is a trouble in
this unit.

Only one horn sounds. Check the sound field setting.

Fuse blown→Replace it with one of the same rating. If the fuse is blown
There is no power supply. again, contact your dealer or after-sales service center.

Check the volume control.


There is no sound
The fast-forward/fast backward function is being used.

154

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 154 2016/7/11 16:04:50


A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 236 2016/7/11 16:05:11
3. Driving Directions

3.1 Starting and Driv- Hint


With the automatic transmission shift lever in P
position and without the brake pedal pressed,
operate the ENGINE START/STOP switch to
ing You can switch the push-to-start switch switch modes in the following order:
mode only when the remote transmitter in
the vehicle. If no button is operated, the ENGINE START/
3.1.1 Ignition switch STOP switch is turned off, which is the OFF
mode. Press the switch: the maximum
Push-to-start switch mode First time——ACC mode (switch indicator be-
comes orange.)
40 Switch on seat heater and cigar lighter.
20

Second time——ON mode(switch indicator be-


0

comes orange.)
VOL

AM/FM

NAVI
The instrument is lit, and all electrical equip-
MODE
MENU
ment is switched on.
Third time——Return to OFF mode (switch in-
OFF
TEMP
dicator goes out.)
Press “ENGINESTART/STOP” switch again to
A/C
TEMP AUTO

return to “OFF mode.

OMA28-0156

The push-to-start switch mode is consistent


with the conventional ignition switch position.
With the remote transmitter in the vehicle, turn
the ENGINE START/STOP switch to the ACC
mode and ON mode to start and stop the en-
gine.

156

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 237 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

To switch among OFF → ACC → ON → OFF, With the brake pedal pressed, the ENGINE
press the ENGINE START / STOP switch suc- START/STOP switch indicator will turn green. Hint
cessively. Then, press the ENGINE START/STOP switch
once, i.e., START mode, to start the engine. • When the vehicle is running, if you
press the push-to-start switch and
Hint hold it or press it for three times
continuously, it will return to ACC
Normally, you can only switch from ACC mode from ON mode to stop the
mode to the ON mode. But once the push- engine to achieve emergency shut-
to-start switch keeps in the ACC mode for down. Do not try to re-start the en-
one hour, the system will go to the power gine until several seconds elapse.
save mode and return to OFF mode auto- • When the vehicle is running, if the
matically. engine shuts down automatically or
the emergency shutdown is used,
With the automatic transmission shift lever in to re-start the engine, just move the
a position other than P and without the brake shift lever in N position and press
pedal pressed, operate the ENGINE START/ the push-to-start switch.
STOP switch to switch modes in the following
order: • If the brake signal failure occurs
during starting, to start the engine,
"OFF" → "ACC" → "ON" → "ACC". It can re- you must turn the push-to-start
turn to “OFF” mode. switch to ACC mode, and then press
and hold it. During starting, make
sure the shift lever is in P or N posi-
tion.

157

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 238 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

• If the power of the remote transmit-


Limp home mode (only for push-to- Conventional ignition switch
ter is low, press the push-to-start start vehicle models)
switch. The Remote Transmitter
Is Not Detected will appear on the
display screen of the cluster. In this 40

case, let the back of the remote


20

transmitter close to the push-to-


start switch surface quickly, and
then press the switch again to enter
VOL

AM/FM

ACC mode. Then, you can start the


NAVI

MODE

engine normally.
MENU

LO
C

K
OFF

ACC
TEMP

O
N
STA RT
A/C
TEMP AUTO

OMA28-0144
OMA28-0165
The conventional ignition switch has four posi-
- In the case of power shortage of your tions.
smart key, you can put the key center LOCK - Parking position, you can insert or re-
onto the "ENGINE START / STOP" move the key only in this position.
switch and press the switch to switch on
the power for Position ACC/ON. Then, Switch on ACC - seat heater and cigar lighter
if the brake pedal is pressed, the green
light is lit. To start the engine, press the ON - Key position while driving, all electrical
switch again. equipment is switched on.
START - Used only for starting the engine.

158

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 239 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

Electronic immobilizer
Note
Electronic immobilizer is used to prevent your
If the key cannot or is difficult to be turned car from being stolen. The transceiver chip in
to the ACC position from the LOCK posi- the ignition key is equipped with an electronic
tion, you can turn the steering wheel back code which is sent to the vehicle. The engine
and forth to disengage its locking mecha- can be started only when the electronic code of
nism until you can turn the ignition key. the transceiver chip is consistent with the reg-
istered vehicle ID code. If an improperly coded
key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.

159

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 240 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

3.1.2 Start the engine When shifting, be sure to press the clutch brake
down all the way down. After shifting in next
Start of vehicle models with G-DCT
gear position, release the clutch brake slowly. transmission
Starting of vehicle model with MT When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot
on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch - Press the brake pedal down all the way
- Press the clutch pedal down all the way to wear out faster. and hold it there.
and hold it there. - Move the shift lever in P or N position.
- Move the shift lever in the N position. Hint - Turn the ignition switch or start switch to
- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to the START position to start the engine.
the START position to start the engine. Once the engine is started, immediately
release the ignition switch or start switch.
Hint
• Once the engine is started, immedi-
ately release the ignition switch.
• For the vehicle models equipped
with conventional ignition switch,
to start the engine, turn the ignition
key to START from LOCK directly
clockwise.

160

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 241 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

Note Note Warning


• To start the hot engine, you may • If engine cannot be started, you can • Do not start or run the engine in a
press the accelerator pedal slightly. try the way of jumper cable, emer- poorly-ventilated place or closed
• When starting the cold engine, let it gently start engine (Please refer to space. Otherwise, the colorless,
idle until it warm up before driving. Page 354 ) odorless and poisonous exhaust
Also, it will take a few seconds for • You’d better don’t use the way of gas will cause personal coma or
the valve tappets to reach their nor- pushing or pulling to start Vehicle even suffocation.
mal operating pressure, resulting engine. • When the engine is running, do not
in running noise which is a normal leave the vehicle alone without su-
phenomenon. Do not worry about pervision.
it. After starting, do not let the en- • Do not start the engine with any
gine run at high speed, or with the auxiliary starting device. Doing so
throttle full open or under overload. can cause explosion or the engine
Doing so can cause damage to the to race, resulting in personal injury
engine. or death.
• The time of starting engine shall not
exceed 10 seconds, if engine is not
started successfully, wait for about
30 seconds, then try again.

161

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 242 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

3.1.3 Shut down the engine. Hint Warning


- Keep the car stable when parking it. • For the vehicle models equipped • When the engine doesn't run, the
- To shut off the engine, turn the ignition with conventional ignition switch, to brake booster also doesn't work.
switch or start switch to Lock or OFF. shut off the engine, turn the ignition Wh e n b ra k i n g, y ou ne e d e x e r t
key to ACC from ON counterclock- harder force to step the brake pedal
After the engine shutdown, the radiator fan will wise, and then press the ignition key to stop the car. Because the steer-
keep running for a period of time. in the direction of insertion and hold ing booster also doesn't work, when
it there, and turn the ignition key to steering, you must exert harder
LOCK counterclockwise again. force to rotate steering wheel.
• For a PEPS model, without the • When the ignition switch or start
smart key in your vehicle, you can- switch is turned to LOCK or OFF,
not shut off the engine via smart the airbags will be disabled.
entry.
• Once the ignition switch or start
switch is turned to LOCK or OFF, the
steering wheel will be locked, caus-
ing the vehicle cannot be turned. Be
sure to avoid accidents.
• Do not let water invade the engine.
When driving on low-lying watery
roads, always prevent water from
invading the engine. Failure to do
so can cause serious damage to the
engine, thus resulting in failure and
damage to the vehicle. This is not
covered by the warranty.

162

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 243 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

3.1.4 Driving - When slowing down, you can get extra


braking from the engine by shifting to a
Shifting into Reverse
lower gear. This extra braking can help - Come to a full stop before you shift into
Manual Transmission you maintain a safe speed and prevent reverse. Press the clutch pedal down
your brakes from overheating while go- all the way while the engine idling and
A/C TEMP
ing down a steep hill. pause for 3s before shifting into reverse.
- When parking, step clutch pedal and - Move the shift lever to N position.
brake pedal, and park the car stably.
- Pull shift lever to the right, and then pull
- Set the parking brake, and move the the shift lever backward to "R" position
shift lever in N position. (reversing) marked on shift lever.
1 3 5

2 4 R
- To shut off the engine, turn the ignition - Release the brake pedal and the parking
switch or start switch to Lock or OFF. brake, and then let the clutch brake up
gradually for reverse driving.
- Turn the steering wheel back and forth to
engage its lock mechanism. In this case, keep the ignition
switch or start switch ON:
OMA28-0058 • Reversing signal lights come on.
• Reverse parking rearview system is
- Make sure that the shift lever is on neu- automatically turned on and reverse
tral position. parking video is shown in cluster screen
- Press the clutch pedal down all the way (applicable to some models).
and then start the engine. • Reverse parking assistant is started.
- Release parking brake handle and turn When the car get near the barrier, it can
shift lever from neutral position of "1" send sound warnings with different fre-
position (low speed), and slowly pull up quency (applicable to some models).
clutch pedal, and then the car starts to
travel.
- When shifting up or down, make sure
you push the clutch pedal down all the
way, shift to the next gear, and let the
pedal up gradually.

163

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 244 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

Precautions during driving Proper use of transmission


Note
• Never shift gear from "5" position (high • Don't use either gentle or hard force to
speed) directly to "R" position (low shift gear. • While driving, do not rest your foot
speed). You can first shift the gear to on the clutch pedal to avoid. Failure
neutral position, and then release clutch • Never start the car at high speed. to do so can cause your clutch to
pedal and shift the gear to "R" position • When the car is traveling, don't put your wear faster.
(reversing) or "1" position (low speed). hands on shift lever to avoid earlier abra- • When shifting up or down, make
• If it is difficult to pull shift lever to "R" sion of shifting yoke. sure you push the clutch pedal
position (reversing) or "1" position (low down all the way to avoid wear and
speed), you can first shift the gear to damage.
neutral position, and then release clutch • When starting the car, you need to
pedal and shift the gear to "R" position release parking brake.
(reversing) or "1" position (low speed).
• If acceleration speed is required due to
some reasons, first shift the gear to low Warning
speed and accelerate speed until the
car get maximum speed on each gear.
Never exceed limit speed on each gear. • When the engine running, once you
Special attention should be paid when shift to a gear other than reverse
accelerating or decelerating on skidding and release the clutch pedal, the ve-
road surface. Sudden acceleration or de- hicle will start to drive immediately.
celeration may cause skidding or out-of- • When the car is traveling, don't shift
control of the car. the gear to "R" position (reversing).
Failure to do so can cause acci-
dents easily.

164

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 245 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

Vehicle model with G-DCT trans- - With the shift lever in D position, the Description of gear positions
default value of gear mode is normal. If
mission you press the switch for driving mode on P (Park)
the shift panel, you can switch among E
→M→D. Come to a complete stop before shifting into P.
- To stop your vehicle, press the brake before shifting into P. Do not move the shift
pedal and park the vehicle on level lever into "P" until you press the lock button
ground. on the front of the shift lever. To shift out of P,
make sure the engine has been started and
- Move the shift lever in the "P" position. the brake pedal has been pressed down all the
way.
- To shut off the engine, turn the ignition
D
M
E
switch or start switch to Lock or OFF. R (Reverse)
P
R
- Exert parking brake. Use R (Reverse) if you need to reverse your
D
vehicle. To shift to R, come to a complete stop
N
E
D M
S
- Turn the steering wheel back and forth to and the engine is idling and then shift. When
engage its lock mechanism. shifting the gear from "P" position or "N" posi-
OMA28-0145 tion to "R" position, you must step the brake
pedal and press the lock button in the front of
Hint shift lever.
- Press the brake pedal down all the way
and then start the engine. • For the vehicle model equipped When the shift lever is in R, if the ignition
- Press the lock button on the front of shift with conventional ignition switch, switch is turned on, the reversing lights will be
lever to shift the gear to "D" position to after the ignition switch is turned to illuminated automatically.
enter into normal gear shifting proce- LOCK, remove the key.
dures. • When the front left door is opened,
if the key is not removed, the sys-
- After shifting into D position, release the tem will give a beep.
brake pedal and press the accelerator
pedal gradually. Then, the vehicle starts • If the ignition switch or start switch
driving. is in LOCK or OFF position and the
shift lever is not moved into P posi-
- To enter the sports mode, move the shift tion, the system will give a beep.
lever into "S".
- To upshift or downshift manually, press
"+" or "-" on the side of the shift lever.

165

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 246 2016/7/11 16:05:12


3. Driving Directions

N (Neutral) During operation, press "+" / "-" on the side of "S" position (sport)
the shift lever once, or move the paddle on the
When the vehicle speed is lower than 5km/h right/left side of the steering wheel once to shift After moving the shift lever to "S" position, the
or the car is in parking condition and ignition up/down to next gear. When the transmission transmission enters into sport mode. This mode
switch is turned to "ON" position, if the shift le- is in gear 1~4, if the engine has reached the is generally used when the engine runs at high
ver should be shifted from "N" position to other maximum speed which the transmission can speed of low gear. It is mainly for the driver to
positions, you must first step the brake pedal bear, the transmission will automatically shift up strive for power during driving condition. It can
and press the lock button in the front of shift to next gear. To prevent engine from running at also be used on hill road condition.
lever. too low speed, the transmission automatically
D (Drive) reduces one gear when the car reaches certain
speed. The transmission carries out gear re- Warning
Use this position for your normal driving. The duction operation only under the condition that
transmission automatically shift up or down the engine and transmission are safe. While driving, do not move the shift lever
according to the engine load and the vehicle to R or P suddenly. Doing so can cause
speed. When you drive your car on mountains or hills, the transmission damage or even acci-
we suggest using this mode to fix transmission dents.
"M" position (manual) to certain gear to prevent frequent gear shifting
operation.
With the shift lever in D, press the button
on the shift panel twice to let the transmission Note
enter manual shift mode. At this moment, the Note
instrument panel will display current actual gear • When the vehicle is running, do not
("5", “4”, “3”, “2” or “1”). Under no matter driv- Once manual mode is selected, unless try to shift into P or R. Doing so can
ing or parking condition, you can manually shift you shut off the engine, move the shift le- cause damage to the transmission.
gears. Under manual mode, the driver can be ver into S or operate the button to exit,
free to select proper gears according the road • When the vehicle is running, do not
condition or his habit, to improve driving joy. the transmission system will be in manual shift into N for coasting.
mode all the time.

166

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 247 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

Manual gear for G-DCT transmis-


Note sion
• The vehicle starts the correspond-
ing shifting program based on
changes in resistance (e.g., traction,
climbing a long slope, etc.), and
moves the shift lever to a lower gear
to give the vehicle more power. This
can prevent frequent shifting.
• The idling speed of the cold engine
is high. Before warming up the en-
gine, be careful to shift into D or R. D
M
E

• When the vehicle stops, do not ac- P


R

celerate the engine speed. Doing so N D


E
D M
S

can cause the vehicle to move ac-


cidently.
• Before starting the engine, make OMA28-0166
sure the shift lever is in P or N. Do
not try to start the engine in any
other gear. With the shift lever in D, press the button
• To move the shift lever into other on the shift panel twice to let the transmission
gear from N, be sure to let the en- enter manual shift mode. For the details, see
gine idle. "M" gear (manual gear) (see Page 247).

167

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 248 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

Shift lever lock release (applicable


to some models)
Hint
If the shift lever can't be moved from "P"
position, please use manual release of
shift lever to unlock it.

1 Note
D
E
M

P
If the Shift Lock Release is needed, this
R
N indicates something is wrong with the ve-
hicle. Go to the company's Vehicle sales
D
S

OMA28-0207 service store to examine Vehicle immedi-


ately.
OMA28-0167
- To move the shift lever into "N" position
from "P" position, press the shift unlock
- Exert parking brake. switch (1) and press the release button
- To shut off the engine, turn the igni- on the front end of the shift lever.
tion switch or start switch to "LOCK " or - Install the cover of shift lever. Step the
"OFF". brake pedal and start the engine.
- Put cloth around the shift lever cap, and
pry and raise the shift panel with a flat
head screwdriver in the direction of ar-
row.

168

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 249 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

When the shift lever is quickly moved through Shifting into Reverse Precautions for parking
N position (for example, from R position to
D position), the shift lever lock will not lock - And park the car stably. • Make sure the moonroof and the win-
the shift lever. Therefore, when the vehicle is dows are closed tightly.
caught in muddy roads, it can get out of trouble - Move the shift lever into R position.
by swaying back and forth. Then, the transmission shifts into Re- • Turn off all door lamps and lock all doors,
verse automatically. inspect all indicator lamps on the instru-
ment panel, and make sure that the im-
Hint - After shifting into Reverse, release the mobilizer system is activated.
brake pedal and press the accelerator
pedal gradually. Then, the vehicle drives • Carry the valuables on your person. Do
When automatic transmission shifts gear in Reverse. not place them in the vehicle.
from one position to another position, the
shift lever will be locked. Therefore, you In this case, keep the ignition switch or start • Do not park the vehicle near flammables
need to press the release button in the switch ON: or explosives.
front of shift lever when shifting gear from
one position to another position. • Reversing signal lights come on. • When parking the car, if the car is to-
wards the top of the hill, you should
• Reversing rearview system is activated make the front wheel away from the
automatically and the reversing image curb.
Note appears on the multimedia display (for
some vehicle models). • When leaving your car, you must take
your ignition key along with you. When
When the car starts, you need to release • Reverse parking assistant is started. exerting parking brake, stop the engine
parking brake. When the car get near the barrier, it can and lock all doors.
send sound warnings with different fre-
quency (applicable to some models). • For the vehicle equipped with manual
transmission, be sure to move the
shift lever into Neutral. For the vehicle
equipped with automatic transmission,
be sure to move the shift lever into P po-
sition.
• If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels towards the curb. If your ve-
hicle has a manual transmission, put it in
R position.

169

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 250 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

Introduction of operating mode of 4. Manual mode: This mode satisfies some


Warning G-DCT transmission
driving pleasure through autonomous
control of gear. With the shift lever in D,
• The driver must carry the ignition For a model with G-DCT transmission, the fol- press the button on the shifting panel
key when leaving the car. Other- lowing four operating modes are available: twice to allow the transmission to enter
wise, the occupants in the vehicle manual shift mode. For details, see "M"
can start the engine or turn on the 1. Normal mode: also called optimal mode, gear (manual transmission) (see Page
electrical equipment accidentally, which takes into account both power per- 247).
resulting in serious personal injury formance and economy, so it is widely
or death. used. With the shift lever in D, the ve-
• When parking the car, you must ex- hicle will operate in this mode. Hint
ert parking brake. If parking, do not 2. Sports mode: This mode is partial to
let any occupant stay in the vehicle. power performance. With the shift lever ECO mode, also known as the economy
Otherwise, the car may move due in Position S, the vehicle will operate in mode or fuel-efficient mode. Your vehicle
to your careless release of parking this mode. can enter ECO mode with the shift lever
brake. in P, R, N, or D. But, it works only with the
• Do not park the vehicle near flam- 3. ECO Mode: This mode is partial to econ- shift lever in D.
mables and explosives. Park the omy. When in ECO mode, TCU uses the When in ECO mode, if the shift lever is
vehicle in the proper direction. Do fuel-efficient shifting strategy and the air moved into Position S, switch to sport
not let the exhaust gas blow out the conditioning takes the appropriate eco- mode. If the shift lever is moved out of
plants, causing damage to the green nomic strategy as well. When the shift Position S, still return to ECO mode.
belt. lever is in D and in the normal mode,
ECO mode is provided with power-off
press the button on the shifting panel memory function, that is, the transmission
once to allow the transmission to enter is still in ECO mode when you start the
ECO mode. Then, the "ECO" indicator engine again after engine stall.
light is lit in the instrument cluster. Press
the button again to return to D.

170

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 251 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

Hint Note
For a model with G-DCT transmission, pay Vehicle model with G-DCT transmission:
attention to the following when in use:
• On urban congested roads and
• When running into traffic lights, we mountain roads, after prolonged
recommend you try to shift in N and traveling, if you smell foreign taste
apply the brake to save fuel. from the clutch, this is a normal
• In urban congestion, when ad- phenomenon. Do not worry about
vancing at low speed in a stop-go that foreign taste which will disap-
manner, we recommend you avoid pear in improved road conditions.
repeated hard acceleration and • The transmission is provided with
sudden stop to save fuel and move overload protection. When the
smoothly and to protect the clutch clutch overheats, the instrument
better. cluster gives a warning message.
Then, drive in manual mode instead
of automatic mode unless the warn-
ing message disappears. If the
warning message still exists, stop
your vehicle in a safe place. Do not
drive until the warning message dis-
appears.
• If you have any questions, please
contact your GAC MOTOR Trumpchi
dealer.

171

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 252 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

3.1.5 Shift Lever Position Displayed on the color TFT


Indicators
Displayed on broken code screen
Driving speed

6 6
40
6 7
6 20
40 8 OMA28-0177
7
20 The current position of the shift lever appears
below the middle of the display screen in the
8 OMA28-0176 instrument cluster (see Page 48).

The current position of the shift lever and up-


shifting/downshifting information appear on the
left lower of the display screen in the instru-
ment cluster (see Page 46).

172

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 253 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

3.1.6 Parking brake Apply the parking brake.


Note
- To apply the parking brake, pull the lever
Mechanical parking brake (appli- up fully.
• While driving, do not use the park-
cable to some models) Release parking brake ing brake to slow down, because
the parking brake only applies the
- To release the parking brake, pull up the brakes on the rear wheels. Doing so
parking brake lever slightly and press the can easily lead to accidents.
button in the front of the parking brake
lever in the direction indicated by Ar- • Do not try to drive the vehicle with-
row, and then press the lever all the way out releasing the parking brake.
down. Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can cause the rear-
wheel brakes overheating, reduce
the braking efficiency and cause the
Note rear brake lining pads to wear out
faster.
After parking be sure to pull up the lever
fully and apply the parking brake.
• If you apply the parking brake after
the ignition switch or start switch is
OMA28-0052 turned to ON position, the parking
brake indicator light comes on. The
indicator light should go out when
the parking brake is fully released.

173

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 254 2016/7/11 16:05:13


3. Driving Directions

Electronic parking brake (EPB) (ap- Exert static parking brake


plicable to some models) Note

This model is equipped with the new generation The electronic parking brake parks the
of motor-integrated caliper EPB. Through the car by using fixed pull force according to
operation of parking switch, driver can realize the degree of slope. If the brake efficiency
the parking and releasing functions of Vehicle. reduces, the following conditions may oc-
When meeting the road condition of ramp, you cur:
can adopt the function of starting aid; under the • The car slides downward after being
circumstance of parking, after stepping down parked on slope road. At this mo-
accelerator pedal, electronic parking would ment, electronic parking brake will D

release automatically, so as to provide conve- automatically increase pull force to


E
M

nient driving aid for driver. park the car. If above condition fre- P
R

quently occurs, please contact the


N
D
S

GAC repair center to inspect park-


ing brake.
OMA28-0192
• After self-energizing effort, the ve-
hicle continues to roll back, use the
service brake for hill-holding, and - To apply EPB, pull up the EPB switch
drive the vehicle on level ground. button in the direction of the arrow until
Contact your dealer for maintenance the indicator light in the instrument is
as soon as possible. lit, and this indicates the parking brake
has been applied to prevent rolling over.
- When the vehicle is stationary, or even
the start switch is turned to the "OFF"
position, EPB can be applied. When you
leave or park the vehicle, make sure the
PB is applied.

174

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 255 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

Release static parking brake Auxiliary uphill start


Hint
When your vehicle has been parked in still on
• After the car stops stably, exert a hill, with your seat belt fastened, starting the
electronic parking brake, and then engine, Hill Start Assist can assist uphill start to
move the shift lever of automatic avoid coasting.
transmission to "P" position.
For a model with G-DCT transmission, press
• If shifting gear or parking the car the brake pedal and move the shift lever from
on steep hill road, you can re-pull P to R or D, and then press the accelerator
up parking brake switch after the pedal to activate HHC. If you finish smooth
parking brake is finished, to ensure starting, the parking brake will be automatically
maximum parking force.
D
E
M

released.
P
R • When the parking brake is applied
For a model with MT transmission, press the
N
D
S or released, operating noise sounds.
clutch pedal and move the shift lever from N
• If your vehicle’s battery has run to other position, and then press the accelera-
down, the Electronic Parking Brake tor pedal to activate HHC. If you finish smooth
OMA28-0193
(EPB) cannot be released. If pos- starting, the parking brake will be automatically
sible, you may start the engine by released.
- Turn ignition switch to "ON" position, and using a booster battery (see Page
step the brake pedal. 354), and then release the parking
brake. Or contact with GAC sale ser-
- To release EPB, press the EPB switch vice shop. Note
button in the direction of the arrow until
• If the EPB has been unused for a
the indicator light in the instrument long time, the system will do self- Failure to wear a seat belt, the parking
goes out, and this indicates the parking test automatically. You can hear the brake cannot be released.
brake has been released. operating noise.

175

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 256 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

Exert dynamic emergency brake


Note Hint
• When the car is moving, if you pull Turn on start switch to exert electronic
up the electronic parking brake parking brake, and the indicator lamp of
switch, the buzzer will send warn- electronic parking brake lights(red) up.
ing sound, and the cluster screen Release electronic parking brake and the
will also display "please release the indicator lamp will go out.
switch of electronic parking brake". • If the red indicator lamp constantly
• During deceleration, if the EPB flashes, it indicates that the parking
switch or the accelerator pedal (for brake is in engage/release condi-
tion, or the electronic parking brake
D

some models) is released, the park-


E
M

P
R ing brake will restore to release has a fault. When the electronic
N
D
condition. If the switch is set until parking brake is in release condi-
tion, the parking brake switch isn't
S

the vehicle is stopped, the parking


brake will remain applied. operated and no automatic parking
OMA28-0192 brake is engaged, if the red indica-
• Unless an emergency situation oc- tor lamp lights up, it indicates that
curs, do not apply the brake by set- the brake force is abnormal. If above
- During the car is traveling, constantly pull ting the EPB switch. Since the EPB condition occurs, please re-carry
up electronic parking brake switch in ar- is applied to the rear wheels only, out parking brake - r e l e a s e o p -
row direction to achieve dynamic emer- the braking distance is longer than eration. If above condition still oc-
gency brake. During emergency braking, that caused by the brake pedal, and curs, please contact your dealer for
if the accelerator pedal is pressed, the the service life of the parking brake overhauling.
system will exit. If emergent braking is system may be reduced.
triggered by non-driver operation, please • If the indicator lamp (yellow) of
step on accelerator pedal heavily to exit electronic parking brake lights up, it
braking. indicates that the electronic system
has a fault detected, and at this mo-
ment, the electronic parking brake is
at low working condition. Then, turn
the start switch to Position "OFF",
operating the parking switch for a
long time, and keep pulling up the
switch.

176

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 257 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

• After turned off, the red status light


EPB is released automatically. Automatic parking (applicable to
stays on and the parking switch will When the accelerator pedal is pressed, with all some models)
not be automatically released, then the doors closed and the driver belted, the EPB
parking is completed. Turn the igni- Auto parking would automatically keep Vehicle
is released. For a model with MT transmission,
tion switch to Position "ON" press motionless according to driver’s braking de-
be sure to press the clutch pedal all the way
and hold the parking switch. If the mand: When the system detects driver’s inten-
down before starting, and press the accelera-
red status light goes out, it means tion of starting (for example, step down accel-
tor pedal in the clutch-linkage state, so that the
the parking brake is released( refer erator pedal), it automatically releases braking;
system can recognize and release the parking
to page 40). according to ramp information, it can ensure
brake. the convenience of Vehicle starting at the time
of automatically releasing braking; when brak-
ing force is insufficient, driver can actively add
Note pressure to make Vehicle motionless.
• When parking, do not press the ac-
celerator pedal suddenly. Doing so
can shorten the EPB service life.
• Auto release of EPB can reduce the
service life of the parking system.
We recommend you use it only for
hill starting.
• If some one operating at the front
and rear of the vehicle or under the
chassis, do not press the accelera-
tor pedal when the engine running
and the transmission has been en-
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle move-
ment can cause damage to persons
or properties.

177

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 258 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

Opening and closing Activation


Note
When this function is opened, automatic park-
ing is supported and the brake is released in When the vehicle is transferred on the
driving/stopping conditions. When the driver conveyor belt, such as vehicle cleaning
stops the vehicle, stop the vehicle by yourself device, it is necessary to close automatic
to avoid sliding at the time of starting driving. parking function. Otherwise, the vehicle
cannot be moved or deviates from run-
Exit ning track.
In the following conditions, automatic parking
D
M
E
exits and parking brake will not be locked:
P
R
N
1. Step on accelerator pedal when starting
D
S to drive.
2. The engine stops during the course of
OMA28-0194 driving.
3. Release electronic parking manual.
- When the engine runs and driver seat
belt is tied, press automatic parking 4. Press automatic parking switch when
switch button to open this function, stepping on the brake. In order to ensure
automatic application switch button in- safety, automatic parking function
dicator is lit. If the Automatic Application in the following conditions shall be closed and
Switch button (indicated by -Arrow B-) is parking brake is locked:
pressed again to de-activate this func-
tion, its indicator light goes out. 1. Engine is stopped.
2. Open driver door or seat belt in stopping
state.
3. Press the switch to cancel automatic
parking.

178

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 259 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

3.2 Electronic Brake The ABS working is equivalent to high-frequen-


cy inching braking. In an emergency, when
Under following conditions, when you step the
brake pedal to activate ABS, if you feel vibra-
you press the brake pedal, you will feel the tion, and it is normal:
System for Driving pedal pulsation and hear some rattles from the
• When shifting.
operating brake master cylinder. This means
the ABS is working properly. Since the brake
3.2.1 Anti-lock Braking Sys- master cylinder adjusts the brake pressure
• When taking emergent braking.
constantly, a force will be fed back to the brake
tem (ABS) pedal continuously. Therefore, in this case, be
• When turning at high speed.
sure to press the brake pedal down all the way. • When driving on wet road.
The Anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an impor- Do not press the brake pedal repeatedly.
tant part of the vehicle active safety system. • When driving on projected or pit road.
The ABS is just a driving assist system which
When the Anti-lock brake system (ABS) acti- plays a limited role. A vehicle with ABS may re- • When making sudden start after the car
vates, the friction between the wheels and the quire a longer distance to stop on loose or un- is started.
road surface belongs to rolling friction. The even surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than on
ABS will take full advantage of the maximum cement pavement or dry surfaces. Do not think
adhesion between the wheels and the road that the ABS braking performance can reach
surface for braking, thus improving braking de- the ideal state in any case. So, do not depend
celeration and shortening braking distance to on the ABS excessively. Only safe driving is the
allow you to maintain steering control. most important.

179

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 260 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) indi-


Front wheel lock cator lamp
With the ignition switch or start switch in Posi-
Danger Squeak tion "ON", ABS indicator light should be lit for
several seconds. After the system completes
Brake start self-test, the warning light goes out (see Page
41).
Front wheel unlock
One of the following conditions with the warn-
ing lamp indicates a fault develops in the sys-
tem:
• When the ignition switch or start switch
is in Position "ON", the warning light is
OMA28-0022 OMA28-0023
not lit.

If the front wheel is locked, the car will lose its If the rear wheel is locked, the drifting condition • When the ignition switch or start switch s
turning capacity and slide along the braking is easy to occur (even reach to 180° drifting in Position "ON", the warning light stays
direction. under serious condition). on.
• The warning lamp stays on while driving.
In the above cases,
the car can still be braked in the conventional
way. However, the ABS will not work. You
should go to our dealer for inspection as soon
as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on with the brake
system indicator and the parking brake is re-
leased fully, this indicates that something is
wrong with the brake system, have your vehicle
inspected by your dealer immediately.

180

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 261 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

Warning Warning
3.2.2 Electronic Brake-force
Distribution (EBD)
Always adjust the vehicle speed accord- Be sure to operate inside the engine com-
ing to the climate, road and traffic con- partment with extra care. The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system,
ditions. To avoid accidents, do not risk • To operate inside the engine com- which is part of the ABS, also balances the
driving depending on the limited safety partment, be sure to read and ob- front-to-rear braking distribution according to
function provided by the system. serve the relevant warnings. vehicle loading.
• The ABS cannot go beyond the ki- • If the ABS indicator and the brake
nematic law! It is still dangerous for The EBD applies a greater braking pressure to
system indicator come on together, the rear wheels by adjusting slip ratio to obtain
a vehicle with ABS to drive on slip- immediately stop your vehicle in a
pery roads! While driving, if you de- the shortest braking distance in the premise of
safe place and check the brake fluid ensuring braking stability. Especially, the EBD
tect the ABS is adjusting the brake level in the reservoir.
pressure, immediately slow down to improves the stability and operability when the
adapt to the road and traffic condi- • If the brake fluid level is normal, the vehicle braking on poor or slippery surfaces.
tions. brake system failure may be due to
the ABS malfunction. When you ap-
• Improper operation or modification ply the brake in such case, the rear
(such as modification of engine, wheels may be locked quickly, lead-
braking system, traveling system or ing to drift and side-slipping. You
wheels and tires) may affect func- should have your dealer remove the
tions of ABS, EBD and ESP. ABS malfunction as soon as pos-
● Specified size of tires must be used sible.
on your car. If your car is installed
with tires with improper size or non-
uniform size, ABS can’t work nor-
mally.

181

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 262 2016/7/11 16:05:14


3. Driving Directions

3.2.3 Electronic Stability


Program (ESP) (Avail-
able in some models)
ESP is short for Electronic Stability Program.
ESP system judges the driver’s driving inten- equipped
tion according to steering wheel angle and Not
vehicle speed, and constantly compares this with ESP
information with actual driving condition. If the equipped automo-
vehicle deviates from the normal running route with ESP bile
(e.g., skidding), the ESP will correct it by apply- automobile
ing a braking force to the appropriate wheels.
The ESP can reduce effectively the risk of side- OMA28-0024 OMA28-0025
slipping.
When the vehicle without ESP is moving, it When the vehicle with ESP is moving, its brak-
slides and departures from the normal lane. ing force can be corrected based on the side-
slip to prevent departure from the lane.

182

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 263 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

The ESP works only when the engine is run- Operating Principle of ESP System ESP warning lamp is lit or flashing
ning. Deactivate the ESP in special circum-
stances. i.e.: The ESP can reduce the risk of skidding by ap- • After ignition switch or starting switch is
plying the brake to the appropriate wheels. The opened, warning lamp shall be ON for
• The vehicle drives with tire chains. ESP determines the driver's intention based about 2 second then OFF.
• When driving on deep snowy or spongy on the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
and other information, compared to the actual • The warning lamp flashes if the ESP ac-
road surfaces. tivates while driving.
driving conditions continuously. If the vehicle
• The vehicle gets stuck (e.g., stuck in the deviates from the normal running route (e.g., • After ESP function is closed, instrument
muddy road), and needs to be moved skidding), the ESP will correct it by applying a ESP O indicator lamp would be ON.
back and forth. braking force to the appropriate wheels.
• If something is wrong with the ESP, the
In the absence of the above, for the sake of The ESP enables the vehicle to go back to the ESP warning lamp comes on.
safety, turn on the ESP. stable running state through the torsional force
generated by braking. If the vehicle tends to • If the ABS fails, the ESP warning lamp
oversteer (i.e., drift), the ESP will mainly apply comes on together with the ABS indica-
the brake to the front wheel on the outer side of tor, and the parking brake and brake
the curve. If the vehicle tends to understeer (i.e., system indicator.
excessive turning radius), the ESP will mainly
apply the brake to the rear wheel inside of the
curve.

183

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 264 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

If the warning lamp comes on and stays on af- Turn on or off the ESP system
ter the engine starts, this indicates that the con- Warning
trol system has shut down the ESP temporarily.
In addition, relevant text information appears Always adjust the vehicle speed accord-
on the cluster display to remind or warn the ing to the climate, road and traffic con-
driver to perform certain operation immediately. ditions. To avoid accidents, do not risk
If this happens, to activate the ESP, turn off driving depending on the limited safety
the ignition switch and then turn it on again. If function provided by the system.
the warning lamp goes out, it indicates that the
system is working. If battery was disconnected, • Remember that the ESP cannot go L
O
R

open the ignition switch or start switch to cause beyond the physical limit of adhe-
A
OFF
2

sion of the road. Be sure to drive or


1

alarm light may was ON, alarm light shall be


0

OFF

out after driving in short distance. drive while towing a trailer on slip-
pery surfaces with extra care.
• Be sure to adjust the driving style at
any time according to the road and
traffic conditions.
OMA28-0114
• The ESP cannot reduce the risk of
accidents caused by high speed,
short distance from the front vehicle - When the vehicle is running, the ESP
and other improper driving style. system is enabled (default).
• Improper operation or modification - Pressing the button (and holding it
(such as modification of engine,
braking system, traveling system or there for more than 3s but less than 10s)
wheels and tires) may affect func- turns off the TCS / ESP system. Then,
tions of ABS and ESP. the indicator light on the combination
instrument is lit and the corresponding
icon appears on the display.

184

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 265 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

3.2.4 Traction Control Sys- Turn on or off the TCS system


Hint
tem (TCS) (applicable
• When vehicle speed is above 80
to some models) km/h, ESP function was opened by
the system. When vehicle speed is
TCS (Traction Control System) is a subsystem below 80 km/h, press down the
of ESP. TCS determines whether the drive button to restart the ESP function.
wheel is slipping based on the speed of the
drive wheel and that of the driven wheel. When L
O
R
A
• If you press the button for more
than 10 seconds, the system will
OFF
2

the former exceeds the latter, TCS will control 1

firmly believe the operation is


0

the speed of the drive wheel to control the ve-


OFF

hicle slipping. wrong, and this has no impact on


the ESP working status.

OMA28-0114

- When the vehicle is running, the TCS


system is enabled (default).

- Pressing the button (and holding it


there for less than 3s) turns off the TCS
system. Then, the indicator light on
the combination instrument is lit and the
corresponding icon appears on the dis-
play.

- Pressing the button (and holding it


there for more than 3s but less than 10s)
turns off the TCS / ESP system. Then,
the indicator light on the combination
instrument is lit and the corresponding
icon appears on the display.

185

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 266 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

3.2.5 Hydraulic Brake Assist Warning Hint


(HBA) (applicable to
The HBA improves your driving safety, but When the vehicle speed is 96 km/h or
certain models) cannot go beyond the kinematic law. Al- more, the left and right turn signals flash
ways adjust your driving speed according during emergency braking. If the brake
The HBA helps you get a shorter braking dis- to the road conditions and traffic condi- pedal is released, when the vehicle speed
tance in an emergency using the pressure tions. exceeds that after the brake is applied for
produced quickly in the brake system. The HBA over 2s, the turn signals stop flashing.
takes full advantage of the ABS characteristics. If the hazard light switch is turned on, the
After the brake pedal is released, the HBA will hazard lights flash for 4s. If the hazard
automatically shut down, and the brake system light switch is turned off, the hazard lights
will return back to normal working conditions. stop flashing.
Most of the drivers can press the brake pedal
timely in dangerous situations, but cannot
press it with sufficient force in a short time, so
that the brake system cannot provide the maxi-
mum braking force, resulting in increased brak-
ing distance and risk of accidents.
A vehicle with HBA will activate the brake as-
sist system when the brake pedal is pressed
quickly. Then, it will produce a greater brake
pressure than normal braking and give full
play to the ABS threshold, so that the brake
system can generate the pressure required for
the maximum deceleration in the shortest time.
Press the brake pedal by force and hold it there
to obtain the shortest braking distance.

186

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 267 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

3.2.6 Hill hold control (HHC) HHC starting conditions


Hint
(applicable to some • When the slope is more than 4%, shift
lever isn't moved to "P" of "ON" position • The HHC can apply the brake auto-
models) (for models with G-DCT transmission), matically when starting on a steep
and manual brake isn't pulled up or elec- uphill or shifting into reverse when
Hill Hold Control (HHC) is integrated in the ESP tronic parking brake isn't exerted, if the going downhill, to prevent slipping.
system. HHC system allows the vehicle to start driver steps the brake pedal to stop the • If the HHC fails, the ESP indicator
on a hill without the parking brake applied, so car or makes the car in stationary condi- light is lit and the instrument cluster
that the driver can easily move his/her feet onto tion, at this moment, the driver releases display gives prompts accordingly.
the accelerator pedal from the brake pedal to the brake pedal, and HAC is activated to
prevent accidents. exert brake to the car. For a model with
MT transmission, the pressure will be
maintained for 1.5s after the brake pedal
is released. For a model with G-DCT
With HHC Hill-start Assist Control transmission, the pressure will be main-
tained for 1s.
• Under HAC working condition, when the
engine torque exceeds the resistance
torque of the car, the brake pressure will
be released to finish starting smoothly.
• For MT model, once the clutch is re-
leased, the HCC function is released im-
mediately.
Without HHC Hill-start Assist Control • Under downhill condition, if the is shifted
OMA28-0026 to "R" position, HHC function is also
working.

187

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 268 2016/7/11 16:05:15


3. Driving Directions

3.2.7 Hill Descent Control Turn on and turn off Hill Descent Press the button to activate HDC. Under down-
hill driving condition, the car travels at a mini-
(HDC) (applicable to Control (HDC) mum 8km/h and keep this speed unchanged.
some models) In addition, the driver can also step the acceler-
ator pedal or brake pedal to adjust speed. If the
speed is between 8km/h and 35km/h when the
HDC is an additional function in ESP system driver releases the pedal, HDC function will be
related to driving comfort. On hill descent con- activated again to keep current driving speed to
dition, by using HDC, the driver can exert brak- descend hill.
ing force through ESP to slowly go down the
hill without using brake. L
O
R • HDC was closed automatically after
vehicle speed is 60 km/h.
A
OFF
2
1
0

• When HDC is effective, if the wheel is


OFF

With HDC
skidding, ABS automatically begins to
work.

OMA28-0115

- When the vehicle speed is lower than


35km/h, press " " button to activate
HDC. At this moment, the " " indicator
light on the instrument lights up.
Without HDC

OMA28-0045
- Re-press " " button to turn off HDC. At
this moment, the " " indicator lamp on
the instrument goes out.
- When the HDC is working, the indicator
lamp flashes. Meanwhile, the tail brake
lamp also lights up.

188

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 269 2016/7/11 16:05:16


3. Driving Directions

Hint Hint
• When HDC has a fault, its function • The operator is not allowed to use
is turned off, and the cluster screen this system to descend hill, or use
displays "please inspect HDC", at low speed gear and labor brake
the same time, the instrument will method to get this purpose.
give alarm about 5s. At this mo-
ment, HDC system can't work. The
operator is not allowed to use this
system to descend hill, or use low
speed gear and labor brake method
to get this purpose. Please contact
the repair center for overhauling.
• Under some special conditions,
HDC system may have some ab-
normalities due to high braking
temperature. For instance, if you
use this system when the ambient
temperature is high, the brake sys-
tem temperature rises due to fric-
tion. When this temperature reaches
certain limit value, HDC enters into
heat protection mode: function
is activated, but the HDC doesn't
work. HDC function will be disabled
in a short time and the car begins
to accelerate speed. After the tem-
perature of brake system reduces to
effective working temperature, HDC
system will be activated again.

189

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 270 2016/7/11 16:05:16


3. Driving Directions

3.3 Cruise Control Canceling the cruise control

System (available To cancel the cruise control, do the following.


The cruise control indicator in the cluster goes
out.
in some models) RES+ • Depress the brake pedal.
The cruise control allows you to maintain a set • Shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
speed of 40 km/h and above without keeping
SET-

your foot on the accelerator pedal.


DISP
• Press the clutch pedal (only for the ve-
hicle with manual transmission).
• Press the button.
Warning
OMA28-0064 • Press the button (to cancel the
• To avoid accidents, the cruise
control is not recommended for cruise control and the set speed).
conditions such as traffic-intensive Activating the cruise control
sections, hills, winding roads, or
slippery roads. You should have full - If the button is pressed and then The following four methods for exiting CRUISE
control of the vehicle under those mode can be achieved by pressing "RES" to
conditions. released, the corresponding indicator restored:
light in the combination instrument turns
• The set speed and the vehicle-to- white. • When depressing the brake pedal
vehicle distance must be adapted
to the current traffic conditions. The - Accelerate the vehicle to the cruising • Press the clutch pedal (only for the ve-
cruise control is only a parking as- speed.(above and equal to 40km/h). hicle with manual transmission).
sist system. Use the cruise control
with extra care. - If "SET-" is pressed and then released, • Shift the transmission into N (Neutral)
the corresponding white indicator light in
• Be sure to deactivate the cruise the combination instrument turns green.
control after using it. Press the button.
- When the vehicle in the cruise control
state, release the accelerator pedal.

190

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 275 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

Resuming the cruise control Increasing the cruising speed


Note
Cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster To increase the speed, do the following:
becomes white. The cruise function can be re- • When the vehicle speed is below
set through the following operation: Accelerate the speed by pressing the accelera- 35 km/h/above 145 km/h, the cruise
tor pedal. control will reback automatically.
- Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed (40km/h and above). Press the - Tap "RES +". The vehicle speed increas- • When the ESP is activated, the
RES button. Then, the cruise control in- es by 2 km/h once. cruise control will stop maintaining
dicator in the instrument becomes green. the vehicle speed automatically.
- Pressing "RES +" increases the speed.
The vehicle speed will return to the • If the EPB switch is operated, the
memory value of the previous set speed If the accelerator pedal or "RES +" button is cruise control will exit automatically.
and keep the vehicle speed. released, you can cruise at a higher set speed. • A vehicle with manual transmission
cannot enter the cruising state when
the shift position is “1” gear posi-
If you exit the cruise in one of the following two Decreasing the cruising speed tion.
conditions, it is unrecoverable by pressing the • A vehicle with automatic transmis-
"RES+" button: To decrease the speed, do the following: sion cannot enter the cruising state
• When button is pressed to turn off when the shift position is in P, N or
- Tap "SET-". The vehicle speed decreas- R.
the cruise. es by 2 km/h once.
• When the transmission is in Position P. - Press "SET-" to continuously decrease.
Release "SET-" button to keep the car at low
speed.

191

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 276 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

3.4 Tire Pressure When you turn the ignition switch or start switch
to the ON or START position and do not start to
Tire temperature display
drive the vehicle, the pressure and temperature
Monitoring System on the instrument are "-.-" and "---".

(TPMS) (applicable
Tire pressure display
to certain models)
Your vehicle is equipped with a direct-type tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni-
tors the pressure and temperature in your tires
while driving through the tire pressure sensors
on the rims and sends the pressure informa-
tion to the receiver from the inside of the tires
through the wireless transmitter. After decoding
analysis, the CAN will send information to the
instrument to display current pressure and tem-
perature. If the tire pressure is too low, or if the
tire leaks quickly, or if the tire temperature and
pressure is high, the receiver will give alarm Hint
signals which appear on the instrument.
When leaving the factory, tire pressure
unit is kpa, and it can be changed to bar
by setting.

192

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 277 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

When the vehicle speed exceeds 25km/h, tire


pressure sensor will send data to receiver. After Note Hint
decoding analysis, the CAN will send informa-
tion to instrument to display current pressure If tire pressure sensor in the tire is re- • When the tire is overheated, has
and temperature. placed, replace the tire or exchange tire high/low pressure, quick leakage,
position, it is necessary to learn and combination instrument will have
If the tire pressure exceeds 150% of the early warning prompt and display
normally-set value, the TPMS (tire pressure match four sensors in the tire again.
Please go to GAC service station. fault tire position circularly; when
monitoring system) indicator light is lit, and the TPMS system has a fault, combina-
instrument cluster display alarms by words, tion instrument will have early warn-
displaying the tire pressure is high. ing prompt and display “the system
If the tire pressure is lower than 75% of normal has a fault, please check” circularly.
value, warning lamp lights up and the cluster • When the high temperature alarm
displays warning message of low tire pressure. happens, it is recommended to stop
driving and take a rest until the tires
If the tire pressure change exceeds certain cool down.
speed, warning lamp lights up and the cluster
displays warning message of tire pressure • If the traveling alarm records have
leakage. not been removed when parking,
the alarm records exist when trav-
If the tire temperature exceeds 85 ℃ , warning eling next time. Both the pressure
lamp lights up and the cluster displays warning and temperature are shown as "-.-
message of high tire temperature. " and "---". But, when the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 km/h, the receiver
will receive update data and update,
and then the alarm records will be
removed.

193

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 278 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

3.5 Drive Reversing 3.5.1 Reversing radar sys- Rear ultrasonic sensors
tem (applicable to
Assist System (ap-
some models)
plicable to some
The reversing radar system assists the driver
models) to park and adjust the parking space. This
system can calculate distance from the rear of
the car to the barrier by using four ultrasonic
The parking assist system is also known as re- sensors. The sensors send and receive ultra-
versing radar system or reversing rearview sys- sonic waves. The electronic system uses the
tem. The reversing radar system consists of the ultrasonic waves sent out and those reflected
ultrasonic sensors (probes), the controller and by the barrier to calculate the distance from the
the buzzer, etc. It can inform the driver of ambi- rear of the vehicle to the barrier. If the rear of
ent barriers in a form of sound, solve the left the vehicle approaches the barrier, the system
and right side vision problems when the driver will sound intermittently to alert the driver. The OMA28-0103
parks, reverses and starts the car, and help the closer the rear of the vehicle approaches the
driver to eliminate blind spot and vague vision barrier, the shorter the beep. The system will
and improve driving safety. send a continuous beep when the rear of the When ignition switch is turned to "ON" position,
vehicle is very close to the barrier. If the vehicle and release parking brake and move the shift
continues to approach the barrier, the system lever to "R" position, the rear ultrasonic sensor
will not detect the barrier any longer. begins to work. The reversing speed should be
less than 10km/h. when the speed is more than
10km/h, the rear ultrasonic sensor is automati-
cally turned off.

194

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 279 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

Hint Warning Warning


When hang out the reverse gear, and ex- • There are blind spots when the ul- • Drops of water on the sensor sur-
erting parking brake or turning off ignition trasonic sensors of the reversing ra- face of the rear bumper can reduce
switch or start switch, the rear ultrasonic dar system detect the barrier. When the sensor sensitivity. To restore
sensor is also automatically turned off. reversing, the driver must observe the sensor sensitivity, wipe off the
carefully to avoid parking accidents. drops of water.
The beep changes with the distance between
the rear bumper and the barrier. • When reversing in a narrow space • The surfaces of certain items can-
or uphill, the system may detect the not reflect the signals from the sen-
railings, trees or slope. This is a sors of the alarm system, so that
Distance from the bumper normal phenomenon. the alarm system cannot detect
• At a faster reversing speed, the such items or persons wearing such
Signal clothing.
Rear angle Rear interme- detection accuracy of the reversing
sensor diate sensor radar system may lower somewhat. • The outside noise source may inter-
The proposed reversing speed fere with the alarm system, so that
Slow should be no more than 2km/h. the system cannot detect the items
intermittent 60~90 cm 60~120 cm When the reversing radar system or persons properly.
beep continues to sound, immediately • The sensors of the reversing radar
stop reversing. Then, the vehicle is system are precision parts. Do not
extremely close to the barrier. Be remove, install or repair the sen-
Rapid sure to avoid accidents.
intermittent 30~60 cm 30~60 cm sors without authorization. Damage
beep • To ensure the function of the sen- caused by removal, installation or
sors on the rear bumper, keep them repair without authorization is not
clean and protect them from being covered by the warranty.
Continuous frozen. Be sure to clean the revers-
Within 30 cm Within 30 cm
beep ing radar system gently and shortly
with a high pressure washer. Make
sure the distance between the noz-
zle and the sensor is at least 10 cm
and more.

195

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 280 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

3.5.2 Reversing Rearview Hint


System (applicable to
The above distance value is measured on
some models) 3 level ground and is only taken as a refer-
ence value of view distance. If there is a
100 120
4 slope, the above distance isn't correct.
The reversing rearview system uses a 180 ° 2
140

wide-angle fisheye camera, providing a large- km/h Please check ambient conditions
and make sure safety
5
scale rear video image on the display screen 1
for the navigation system. Allow the driver to VOL TUNE

grasp various road conditions behind the ve-


AM/FM NAVI

SEL
MODE MENU SET

hicle in an all-around manner.


MODE
OFF TEMP

AUTO

A/C

OMA28-0035
TEMP

- Turn ignition switch to "ON" position


and move the shift lever to "R" position
to enter into reversing parking rearview
picture. Rear view is displayed on the
screen of navigation system.
Reference level distances from four lines
shown in screen to rear bumper-5 are respec-
tively:
Line 1: 0.5 m
Line 2: 1 m
Line 3: 2 m
Line 4: 3 m

196

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 281 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

Turn off reverse parking rearview


Warning system
When looking from rear position, the - Move the shift lever to "R" position to
camera has blind area. Special attention turn off reverse parking rearview system.
should be paid to the children and pets
around the car, because the camera can't
find children or little pets. Warning
Reverse parking rearview system can't
exempt the driver's liability to observe
parking environment. The driver should
concentrate his attention to park the car
OMA28-0196
and adjust the car position based on ac-
tual condition.

To get optimal image, keep the rear camera


always clean and don't cover it. When cleaning
camera, use soft wet cloth to avoid scratching
of camera lens.

197

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 282 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

3.6 Energy-saving de- Instrument display in ECO mode

vice (applicable to
some models) 3
4
5

3.6.1 ECO mode 2 6

1 7
This mode is partial to economy. When in ECO
mode, TCU uses the fuel-efficient shifting strat- 1000
r/min
8
egy and the air conditioning takes the appropri-
ate economic strategy as well.
When the shift lever is in D posion, press the
button on the shifting panel to enter ECO OMA28-0178
mode. The prompt function for economic fuel
consumption is added in this mode. When the vehicle enters ECO mode, petal-like
energy level (5 levels) will be displayed on the
Press the button again to exit ECO mode instrument. The more the petal, the better the
and enter another shift mode. energy saving level.
Premise for display:
• Start the engine
• Enter the ECO mode.
• The vehicle speed exceeds a certain
value.

198

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 283 2016/7/11 16:05:17


3. Driving Directions

3.7 Electrical power If the EPS fails, stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and then shut off the engine and re-start
the engine. Then, if the indicator stays on, or
steering system 100 120
comes on again while driving, go to your autho-
80 rized GAC Motor dealer to have your vehicle
(EPS)
140
checked and repaired.
60 160
40 180
The Electric Power Steering (EPS) is a power
steering system which directly depends on the 20 200
motor to provide the assist torque. The EPS is km/h

mainly composed of a torque sensor, a motor, 220


a reducing mechanism and an electronic con-
trol unit (ECU) and so on.
The ECU performs real-time control over the OMA28-0195
booster motor torque output by detecting the
driver’s torque input, as well as vehicle speed,
engine speed and other vehicle status signal, The ECU is equipped with both warning lamp
to provide the best steering assist to ensure alarm and text alarm. The EPS indicator comes
low-speed steering agility and high-speed on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON
steering stability and improve driving comfort position. After starting the engine for a few sec-
and vehicle safety. onds, the warning lamp goes out after the EPS
finishes self-checking. This indicates the EPS
is working properly.
If the warning lamp comes on after starting the
engine or when driving, it indicates a trouble
develops in the EPS, and the corresponding
alarm text appears on the instrument LCD.

199

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 284 2016/7/11 16:05:18


3. Driving Directions

3.8 Driving technique Before starting the engine 12V battery conditions and cable: Inspect the
condition of 2 V battery according to the color
1. Vehicle exterior of indicator lamp. Inspect whether there is cor-
3.8.1 Check of Driving Safety Tires: Check the tire pressure, and check for
rosion or loosening on terminal and cracks on
the shell. Inspect if the cable and connections
cuts, damage or excessive wear. are good.
You should do the following checks and adjust-
ments before you drive your vehicle. Checking Wheel bolts: Make sure there is no missing or After starting the engine
your vehicle for a few minutes will help to safe loose bolt.
driving and enjoyment of pleasure of driving. Lights: Make sure headlights, brake lights, tail Fuel, oil and water leakages: Park the vehicle
You just need to know various parts of the ve- lights, turn signals and other lights all work for a while, and check the vehicle bottom for
hicle basically and have a very keen (sharp) properly. Inspect headlamp lightening direction. fuel, oil, water or other fluid leakages. If the air-
vision. conditioning drips after being used, this is nor-
Vehicle interior mal.
Seat belts: Check the seat belt and make sure Oil level: Park the vehicle on level ground, and
the buckles are locked. Make sure the seat shut off the engine and check the oil level on
belts are free of wear or damage. the dipstick (see Page304).
Instrument and controllers: in particular, make While driving
sure that the instrument indicator lights and de-
frosters are working properly. Instrument: Make sure the instrument is work-
ing properly.
Brake pedal: Make sure the brake pedal’s free
travel is enough. Brakes: Check and make sure the vehicle does
not pull to one side during braking on a safe
Coolant level: Make sure the coolant level is road.
correct (see Page 312).
Other abnormalities: Check the parts for loose-
ness and leakage, and listen to whether there
are unusual noises.

200

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 285 2016/7/11 16:05:18


3. Driving Directions

3.8.2 Driving during Break-in Breaking in engine At the early of break-in period, the internal fric-
tional resistance of the engine is much greater
Period A new engine must be run in for 1500 km. than that after the break-in period. All the mov-
ing parts of the engine must be run in before
In 1000km achieving the best fit.
To ensure your vehicle’s service life, pay extra
attention to how you drive at the initial stage • Make sure the vehicle speed does not If the engine has been run in according to the
before putting your vehicle into normal use. exceed 3/4 of the maximum speed. above requirements, its service life can be
Break-in period: prolonged and its fuel consumption can be re-
• Avoid full-throttle driving. duced.
• Mileage in running-in period is 1500km.
• Avoid high engine speeds.
• Drive on good roads under reduced load
at limited speed. • Do not tow a trailer.

• Avoid full-throttle starts or rapid accelera- You can increase the engine speed and the
tion. vehicle speed to the maximum allowable range
gradually.
• Avoid emergent braking within the first
300km.
• Implement the operating instructions
strictly and keep the engine operating
temperature normal. Do not change the
oil until the scheduled maintenance time.
• Do well in the routine vehicle mainte-
nance work seriously, and always check
and tighten the external fastening bolts
and nuts. Pay attention to the sound
and temperature changes of various as-
semblies during operation, and perform
adjustment timely.

201

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 286 2016/7/11 16:05:18


3. Driving Directions

Breaking in tires and brake pads


Hint Hint
To break in new tires, drive at moderate speeds
within the first 500 km. • If new tires and brake pads had not • Heavy workload can cause your
been run in, they would not be pro- brakes overheat while going down a
Be sure to break in new brake pads carefully vided with the best adhesion and steep hill. We recommend you slow
for the first 200-300 km to achieve the optimal friction. Be sure to drive carefully down by shifting to a lower gear so
friction state. during the first 500km to run in the that you can get extra braking from
tires well to avoid accidents. the engine to reduce your brakes’
• You should also follow these recom- workload.
mendations when the brake pads • Always apply the brake according
are replaced. to the road and traffic conditions.
• Keep an appropriate vehicle-to- Avoid unnecessary application of
vehicle distance and try to avoid brake pedal. Doing so can cause
emergency braking while driving. brake overheating, resulting in a
This is because new tires and brake longer braking distance and exces-
pads which have not been run in sive wear.
can cause accidents easily. • Do not coast by turning off your
• If the brakes are affected with damp engine. Since the brake booster is
or frozen or you drive on salt roads, disabled, the braking distance will
the braking effect can drop. get extended greatly, resulting in ac-
cidents.
• Do not prolong the service time of
the brake fluid. Be sure to replace
the brake fluid according to the
maintenance intervals in the War-
ranty Booklet.

202

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 287 2016/7/11 16:05:18


3. Driving Directions

3.8.3 Essentials for Driving Warning


under Various Condi-
• Before driving, make sure the park-
tions ing brake is released fully and its
indicator has gone out.
• Always drive at a lower speed in a lateral • When you are driving, do not rest
gust. Doing so can maintain full control your foot on the brake pedal. Doing
of your vehicle. so can cause dangerous overheat-
• Maintain an appropriate angle to avoid ing and unnecessary wear and fuel
driving at high, sharp-edged objects or waste.
other barriers on roads. Failure to do so • Slow down by shifting to a lower
may cause tire burst and other serious gear when going down a steep hill.
damage. Remember that using the brakes ex-
cessively can cause them too over-
• Slow down if you ever drive your vehicle heated to work properly.
on very rough or rutted roads. You could
damage the suspension and underbody • Use caution during acceleration,
by impact and bottoming out. upshifting, downshifting or braking
on slippery road surfaces. Sudden
• Brake may be wet when the vehicle is acceleration or engine braking can
washed or is running through deep wa- cause wheel slip or wheel spin.
ter. Pay attention to the safety around, • Do not drive any more when brake
and then gently press the brake pedal. is wet. If the brakes get wet, the
If there is no brake force, the brake may braking distance will be longer than
be wet. To dry the brakes, press the usual when the brake is applied and
brake pedal with the parking brake ap- the vehicle may pull to one side.
plied. Drive your vehicle with care. If the The parking brake cannot stop the
brakes still cannot work properly. Park vehicle firmly, either.
your vehicle on the roadside and contact
your dealer for help.

203

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 288 2016/7/11 16:05:18


3. Driving Directions

3.8.4 Efficient Use of the Ve- • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal.
Doing so can cause early wear, over-
accelerator pedal hard when starting or
press the brake pedal hard to stop.
hicle heating or fuel waste.
• Do not drive at high speed with the win-
• Avoid hitting curbs while driving. Slow dows open.
• Maintain the correct tire pressure. Insuf- down when driving on rugged roads.
ficient tire pressure results in tire wear • Use the air-conditioning, audio system
and waste of fuel. For tire pressure • Don't let the chassis stick mud. This can and other properly.
parameters(please see page 337). reduce self-weight of the car and prevent
corrosion. • Close all doors unnecessary to open.
• Make sure the wheel alignment is ac-
curate. Inaccurate wheel alignment can • Adjust the vehicle to keep it in the best • If you need to park your vehicle for an
cause the tires wear out faster, increase working condition. Dirty air filter, improp- extended period of time, shut off the en-
the engine load and waste fuel. er valve clearance, dirty spark plugs, gine and prevent the engine from idling
dirty oil and grease, etc., will reduce for a prolonged time.
• Avoid loading unnecessary weight in engine performance and waste fuel. To
your vehicle. Excess weight increases • Drive on level road surfaces at economic
extend the service life of all components speed.
the engine load, resulting in significant and reduce operating costs, be sure to
fuel consumption. perform scheduled maintenance. Main- • Always drive in an appropriate gear
tain your vehicle more frequently if you based on the running speed. Do not
• Slowly accelerate speed, and avoid sud- often drive under a severe condition.
den start. Try to drive in a higher gear as drive in a low gear at high speed.
soon as possible. Fuel-efficient driving • Be sure to maintain your vehicle as per
• Try to avoid traffic jam to prevent con- the scheduled maintenance.
tinuous acceleration and deceleration as Fuel-efficient driving can not only save fuel but
well as stop-go which cause fuel waste. also protect environment.

• Avoid unnecessary parking and braking • After cold start, you can drive away slow-
and keep a stable vehicle speed. Try to ly for several minutes. Do not accelerate
drive by matching up the traffic lights to until the engine warms up.
minimize the number of stops, or take • Unload the unnecessary cargoes before
advantage of thoroughfares without traf- driving.
fic lights. Keep an appropriate vehicle-
to-vehicle distance to avoid emergency • Keep the tire pressure properly.
braking. This will reduce wear of the
brake. • Try to drive on good roads.
• Avoid rapid acceleration. Press the ac-
celerator pedal gently. Do not press the

204

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 289 2016/7/11 16:05:18


A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 290 2016/7/11 16:05:18
4. Maintenance

Potential Vehicle Hazards


4.1 Maintenance De- Warning
• Carbon Monoxide: Carbon Monoxide
scription Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or from engine exhaust is poisonous. Be
sure there is adequate ventilation when-
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be se- ever you operate the engine.
Important Safety Precautions riously hurt or killed.
• Burns from hot parts: The engine and ex-
To eliminate potential hazards, read the instruc- haust system are very hot during opera-
tions before you begin, and make sure you tion, and this can cause scalding easily.
have the tools and skills required. Therefore, shut off the engine and wait
for at least 30 minutes to let the engine
• Make sure your vehicle is parked on and exhaust system cool down before
level ground, the engine is off, and the touching any parts.
parking brake is set.
• To clean parts, use a commercially avail-
able degreaser or parts cleaner, not Note
gasoline.
Some of the most important safety pre-
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explo- cautions are given here. However, we can-
sion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames not warn you of every conceivable hazard
away from the battery and all fuel-related that can arise in performing maintenance.
parts. Only you can decide whether or not you
• Wear eye protection and protective should perform a given task.
clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.

206

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 291 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

4.2 Interior Care Note


Cleaning and maintaining the car-
pet
Cleaning and maintaining the in- Solvent-containing cleaning agents may Please frequently clean dust on the carpet with
strument and plastic parts damage the plastic parts. the cleaner

Clean the surfaces of the instrument and plas- Periodically shampoo the carpet with the foam-
tic parts with a clean soft cloth and fresh water. type cleaner to keep it clean.
Warning
Otherwise, use the special solvent-free plastic
cleaning agent. Do not use any driver’s compartment
spray or solvent-containing cleaning
agent to clean the surfaces of dashboard
and airbag assemblies. Doing so could
loosen the surfaces and inflate the air-
bags, resulting in serious personal injury.

207

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 292 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

Cleaning and maintaining the


Note leather (for some vehicle models) Note
Follow the instructions that come with the - Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather After you wipe the leather using the spe-
cleaner. frequently. cial detergent, wipe it down as soon as
possible with a soft, dry cloth.
- Clean the leather with a soft cloth damp-
ened with clear water.
Warning
- Then, buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Warning
It is strictly forbidden to add foam deter- - If further cleaning is needed, use a soap
gent into water. Make sure that the rug is specifically for leather, such as saddle Never place a soft cloth dampened with
dry. soap. detergent in any part of the interior for
an extended period of time. Doing so can
cause discoloration or breakage to the
resin or fiber of the interior braided fab-
rics.

208

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 293 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

Cleaning and maintaining the seat


belts Note Warning

- Pull out each belt fully gradually and hold • Do not retract the seat belts until • Do not use chemical cleaning
it there. they are dry completely. Doing so agents to clean the seat belts to
can cause damage to the retractors. avoid damage to the seat belt web-
- Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild • You should check the condition of bing, affecting its function.
soap and warm water to clean them. your seat belts regularly to keep • When replacing the belt, be sure to
- Let the belts air dry before you retract them clean and ensure they func- use a new belt of the same model
them. tion properly. and structure.
• Whether damaged or not, be sure to
replace the seat belts after a crash.
• Prevent foreign matter or liquids
from entering the seat belt buckles.
Failure to do so can cause the buck-
les and the belts to function abnor-
mally.
• Do not remove or modify the belts
in any case.
• Always check the condition of your
seat belts regularly. If any damage
to the belt webbing, anchors, retrac-
tors or buckles is detected, have
your dealer replace them.

209

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 294 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

4.3 Exterior Care Note


Manual washing
- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cool
Car washing • Although the body paint is strong to water to remove loose dirt.
withstand the flushing from the au-
Frequent washing helps preserve your vehicle’s tomatic car washer, pay attention to - Prepare a bucket of water and mix the
beauty. its impact on the paint. The washer water with special washing detergent.
structure, detergent, fresh water - Wash the vehicle, using a soft cloth,
Wash your vehicle in a shady area, not in direct filtration, and type of wax solvent
sunlight. If the vehicle is parked in the sun, sponge or bristle brush. Start at the top
which do not meet the specified re- and work your way down. Rinse fre-
move it into the shade and let the exterior cool quirements are likely to cause dam-
down before you start. quently.
age to the paint.
Follow the instructions of the operator when us- • After washing, due to dampened or - Finally, rinse the wheels, doorsills and
ing an automatic car washer. even frozen brakes, the braking ef- others. When washing, replace the
ficiency will be reduced to some ex- sponge or soft cloth.c
tent. After washing, try to avoid sud- - After you finish scrubbing, rinse the ve-
Warning den stop to avoid traffic accidents. hicle thoroughly with a plenty of water.

Turn off the ignition switch or start switch - When you have washed and rinsed the
before you start washing. whole exterior, dry it with a chamois or
soft towel.

210

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 295 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

Note Warning Warning


Check the body for road tar and other Water, ice and antiskid salt in the Brake • Be sure to read and follow the rel-
stains. Remove these stains with tar re- system can cause reaction retardation of evant information and warnings be-
mover. Rinse it off immediately so it does the brakes, resulting in a longer braking fore using.c
not harm the finish. As you dry the ve- distance which is likely to lead to acci- • During manual washing, pay atten-
hicle, check it for chips and scratches. If dents. tion to personal safety and beware
any, have your dealer repair it. • If your vehicle has just been of angular parts at the underbody to
washed, try to avoid emergency avoid being scratched.c
Use extra care to wash the vehicle with a high- braking.
pressure washer. Follow the instructions and • When washing, pay special atten-
requirements which come on with the high- • Press the brake pedal gently to test tion to the underbody and the inside
pressure washer. Pay particular attention to the brakes before driving. of the wheel cover and other parts.
the operating pressure and the spray rinsing • Try to avoid braking before remov- Protect your hands and arms from
distance. ing the ice or antiskid salt from the being injured by sharp parts.
brakes. Apply the brake with extra • Do not spray water into the engine
care to avoid traffic accidents. compartment when washing your
vehicle. Doing so can affect the ser-
vice life of the parts in the engine
compartment.

211

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 296 2016/7/11 16:05:18


4. Maintenance

Waxing In general, there two types of prod- Cleaning and maintaining the ex-
Regular waxing helps protect your vehicle ucts: ternal plastic parts
body’s paint and keep the body bright and Waxes: A wax coats the finish and protects it In general, clean the external plastic parts
clean. from damage by exposure to sunlight, air pollu- with fresh water, soft cloth and bristle brush.
Always wash and dry the whole vehicle before tion, etc.. You should use a wax on your vehicle If cleaning is needed further, use the recom-
waxing it. when it is new. mended special solvent-free plastic cleaning
agent.
You should use a quality paint protective wax. Polishes: Polishes can restore the shine to
paint that has oxidized and lost some of its
In order to protect body paint surface, it is sug- shine. They are mainly used to restore the
gested to high quality hard wax every year to shine to paint.
Note
protect paint surface from being corrosive due
to poor environment and withstand light me- Do not use any solvent-containing clean-
chanical scratch. Note ing agent to clean the plastic parts. Doing
so can cause damage to the plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a dusty envi-
ronment.

212

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 297 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

Cleaning the windows and outside If you finish the body surface maintenance, Cleaning the front wiper blades
remove the residual wax on the glass with
mirrors the special cleaning agent and cloth. to avoid
scratching the wiper blade.
Clean the window glass and mirrors with alco-
holic glass cleaner, and then dry glass surface Remove the snows on the windows and mirrors
with a clean, lint-free, soft cloth or chamois using a bristle brush.
towel.
Remove ice using the special spray. You can
also remove the ice using the scraper with ex-
Note tra care to avoid damage to the parts. Be sure
to scrape the ice in the same direction.
Do not wipe off the glass of the windows
and mirrors with the chamois towel which Note
has been used to clean the paint. The
residual wax on the chamois can blur the
glass surface. • Do not scrape the ice back and
forth. OMA28-0146
If there is residual rubber, grease and
silicone on the glass, remove it using the • Do not use warm or hot water to
special window cleaner or silicone clean- remove the ice and snow from the Operation:
er. windows and mirrors. Doing so can
cause the glass damage. - Turn the ignition switch or start switch
from Position LOCK / OFF to Position
ON, and then switch it to Position LOCK
/ OFF.
- If you turn the wiper combination switch
to MIST within 10s after the previous
step, the wiper arm will move half a turn.
- Raise the wiper arm and remove dust
and dirt from the wiper blade with a soft
cloth.

213

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 298 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

- If you finish cleaning, lower the wiper Maintaining the sealing strips
arm gently down against the windshield. Note
c Frequent and appropriate protection of the rub-
• Replace the damaged blade in time. ber sealing strips for the doors, windows and
- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to other parts can maintain their flexibility and
“ON” position, wiper arm will reset auto- • A new wiper blade surface is coated prolong their service life. This can also improve
matically. with a layer of graphite which can the leakproofness, allow the door to be opened
make the wiper blade to move easily and reduce the impact sound of closing
smoothly without scratching noise. the doors. They can also be protected from be-
The graphite layer damage can ing frozen in winter.
cause increased scratching noises.
Be sure to repair it timely. Maintenance operation:
• Solvent-containing detergents, hard
sponge and sharp tools will cause - Remove the dust and dirt with a soft
damage to the graphite layers. cloth.
• In winter or cold weather, check - Apply the special protective agent to the
whether the wiper blades are frozen rubber sealing strips regularly.
against the windshield before op-
erating them. If so, remove the ice
from the wiper blades firstly. Failure
to do so can cause damage to the
wiper blades and the wiper motor.

214

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 299 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

Cleaning and maintaining the


wheels Note

Regular maintenance helps preserve the • Be sure to clean the wheels with
wheels’ beauty. Removing the antiskid salt acid-free detergent.
and wear debris from the wheels can keep the • Do not clean the wheels with the
wheel surface finish and prolong their service auto polishing agent or other abra-
life. sive.
Do the following operations periodically: • If the protective clear-coat of the
wheels is damaged, be sure to re-
• Remove the anti-skid salt and brake pair it in time.
wear debris from the wheels with acid- • Using the high-pressure washer
free cleaner fortnightly. may cause permanent visible or in-
• Wax the alloy wheels with high-quality visible damage to the wheels, caus-
hard wax every three months. ing casualty.
• Never clean the tires with the cluster
nozzles. Even a long-distance clean-
ing for a short period of time may
cause damage to the tires, causing
traffic accidents.

215

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 300 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

4.4 Checking and Adding Fluids


General layout of engine compart-
ment
1. Dipstick
2. Washer fluid reservoir
3 4 5 6 7 3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Battery
7. Fuse box

2 1
OMA28-0134

216

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 301 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

4.4.1Checking and Refueling Filling the Fuel tank

Inspect fuel

Only for
or above
unleaded

详见

Driving speed

6 6
40 OMA28-0139

7
20 OMA28-0190
- The fuel tank filler is in the rear on the
right side of the vehicle. Unscrew the
8 OMA28-0179 - In unlocking state, pull up opening han-
dle of fuel cap on left lower corner of the
instrument panel along the arrow and moment so that gas pressure inside the
With the reduction of fuel volume during travel- fuel cap ejects automatically. tank escapes, and then remove the fill
ing of the car, the scale reading of fuel gauge cap.
gradually reduces. When the fuel amount is
little, the indicator lamp lights up (please refer - Please refer to the description on the fuel
Warning
to page 38). At this moment, it is necessary to requirement lable at the fuel filler door of
Dry weather can cause static electricity each vehicle.
easily. Discharge the static electricity on
your body before opening the fuel cap - -
to prevent sparks generated by the elec- wise until you hear three "click" sounds,
tricity from igniting fuel vapor. -
ened.

217

2016/7/11 16:05:19
4. Maintenance

4.4.2 Engine oil Always use the recommended oil Low oil pressure indicator
The premium-grade oil in the engine at the If the warning lamp lights up (see page
Engine oil function delivery of the vehicle can be used for a whole 38)and sends three warning sounds, you must
year except in an extremely cold climate. immediately stops the engine and inspect en-
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s lubri- gine oil level. If necessary, add oil.
cation, sealing, cooling, anti-corrosion, cleaning When you purchase the engine oil, check
and other. whether the specifications on the oil package In addition, a text message appears on the
are applicable to your engine. cluster display screen and reminds or warns
you to implement the relevant operations im-
mediately (apply to some models).
Warning Do not continue to drive or let the engine idle if
the low oil pressure indicator still stays on even
• Only use the oil applicable to your if the oil level is normal. Contact your dealer to
engine. have the system checked and repaired as soon
• Failure to do so may cause the en- as possible.
gine damage. Beware of accidents.

Warning
Hint
Ignoring the low oil pressure indicator and
the relevant warnings can cause serious
Engine oil specification: SN grade and accidents.
above
Oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
Engine oil volume: 4.2 L

218

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 303 2016/7/11 16:05:19


4. Maintenance

Check engine oil levels If the indicator in the cluster comes on, immedi-
Hint ately check the oil level, and add oil as needed.
Check the oil level on the dipstick.
The low oil pressure indicator cannot indi-
cate the engine oil level. Be sure to check • The oil level near or below the lower
the oil level regularly. You’d better check mark can cause damage to the engine.
the oil level while refueling.
• The oil level above the upper mark can
cause damage to the three way catalytic
converters.

Note
If inspecting engine oil level when the en-
gine is in hot condition, please first stop
the engine and wait for several minutes
until the engine oil flows back to fuel pan, OMA28-0135
and then inspect engine oil level again.
When the engine is in cooling condition,
immediately inspect oil level. - Park the vehicle on level ground.
- Closed the engine
- Open engine compartment cover.
- Remove the dipstick.

219

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 304 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Every engine will consume a certain amount of Engine oil level warning lamp
oil which depends on the driving patterns and
driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check If the indicator light on the cluster lights up,
the oil level. You’d better check the oil level immediately stop the car, inspect oil level and
L H while refueling and before long drive. fill engine oil if necessary.
Do not let the oil level exceed the upper mark
- A - when the engine running in harsh condi-
tions when the vehicle driving a long distance Warning
on a highway in summer, or towing a trailer, or
traveling along a mountain road. Be sure to operate inside the engine com-
partment with extra care.

OMA28-0138

- Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth.


Insert the dipstick all the way back into
its hole.
- Remove the dipstick again, and check
the level. If it is near or below the lower
mark, add oil as needed.
• H - Upper mark of oil.
• L - Lower mark of oil.
• The oil level should be between the
lower mark-L- and the upper mark-H-.

220

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 305 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Fill the engine oil. - Once the oil level reaches the upper
Note mark - A -, stop adding oil and reinstall
When adding engine oil, pour in the oil slowly and tighten the oil fill cap.
Never start the engine if the oil level and carefully by several stages.
above the upper mark - A-. Otherwise, it
may damage catalytic converter and en- Warning
gine. Please contact your GAC dealer to
inspect the engine. • Read and follow the relevant warn-
ings before starting operation.
• Engine oil is a type of highly com-
Hint bustible material. Always add oil
with extra care. Pour in the oil slow-
The oil level marks on the dipstick which ly and carefully so you do not spill
is shown in the figure and may be differ- any on the hot engine components
ent from that of your vehicle in form and or exhaust system.
color are applicable to all dipsticks. • Always keep the oil fill cap tightened
securely to prevent the oil from
spilling when the engine operating,
OMA28-0301 resulting in a fire.

- Park the vehicle on level ground.


- Stop the engine.
- Open engine compartment cover.
- Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill
cap.
- Pour in the recommended oil slowly and
carefully by several stages.
- To avoid filling above the upper mark,
add a little oil each time and recheck the
oil level until you bring it to the upper
mark.

221

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 306 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Replace the engine oil If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
Note or use the fuel of high sulphur content or fre-
Replace the engine oil as per the intervals quently drive a short distance, or let your en-
Never start the engine if the oil level above specified in the Warranty Booklet! gine idle for a long time (e.g., taxi), or drive in
the upper mark - A-. Doing so can cause dusty areas, or often drive your vehicle to tow
damage to the catalytic converters and Have your dealer replace the engine oil. a trailer, or drive your vehicle in cold area s, be
the engine! Contact your dealer to have sure to increase the number of maintenance
the engine checked as soon as possible. times for some maintenance items between
periodic maintenances, or narrow the mainte-
nance period.

Hint Additives in the engine oil may change the new


oil color fade. This is normal. There is no need
to change the oil in advance.
Make sure the oil level is not above the
upper mark - H-. Otherwise, the oil can be
absorbed into the crankcase ventilation
device and discharged to atmosphere
through the exhaust system.

222

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 307 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Warning Note Hint


Unless you have the knowledge and No lubricant should be added into engine • Do not dispose of waste oil by your-
proper equipment, you should have the oil oil; otherwise, it may damage engine. Any self unless you have the profession-
changed by a skilled mechanic. fault caused by addition of lubricant isn't al knowledge and special tools. So,
included in quality guarantee. we recommend you have your GAC
• Make sure the engine is cool before MOTOR dealer operate it.
operating. Hot oil may seriously
scald you. • Improper disposal of engine oil can
be harmful to the environment and
• To prevent oil from getting into your water source. Do not discard it in a
eyes, be sure to wear goggles when sewer line or dump it on the ground.
changing the oil. Otherwise, it will be very expensive
• When unscrewing and removing the to treat the soil polluted by the used
oil drain plug, be sure to place your oil.
arm horizontally to prevent the oil
from flowing along it.
• If stained with oil. Flush your skin
thoroughly with clean water.
• Drain the used oil into a special
container which is large enough.
• Do not store the used oil in a food
container or other non-original con-
tainer to avoid confusing, resulting
in poisoning.
• As engine oil is toxic, before dis-
posal of waste oil, please first put
it on safe place to prevent children
from touching it.

223

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 308 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

4.4.3 Coolant To get optimal corrosion protection, the system


must be filled with the coolant mixed with pure Warning
water and at least 50% of DF-6 cooling addi-
Coolant function tive. • The coolant must be stored in the
original container. Keep both the
Coolant is a major contributor to your engine’s coolant and the used coolant out of
anti-freezing and anti-corrosion. the reach of Children.
Coolant specifications • Do not store the coolant in a food
container or other non-original con-
This coolant should always be a mixture of tainer to avoid confusing, resulting
50% antifreeze and 50% water. in poisoning.
• Make sure the anti-freezing capabil-
Before leaving factory, the cooling system is ity of the coolant is sufficient in cold
filled with coolant mixed with pure water and weather. Add enough DF-6 additive
50% DF-6 cooling additive with anti-freezing based on the environment tempera-
capacity of -35 ℃ . This coolant can prevent ture. Otherwise, the coolant may
corrosion of alloy parts of cooling system and be frozen, resulting in the vehicle
water scales and improve coolant boiling point. shutdown. In addition, the driver
Density of coolant should not be less than 50%. and passengers will be exposed
No matter whether it is necessary to prevent to severe cold due to the disabled
freezing, coolant mixed with additive should be heating system.
used in full year.
If the anti-freezing capability of the coolant
needs to be increased, you can appropriately
increase the proportion of the additive. But,
the concentration of coolant should not exceed
65%. Otherwise, the anti-freezing capability of
the coolant will be reduced, resulting in weak-
ened cooling effect, on the contrary.

224

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 309 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

High engine coolant temperature


Note Hint
Do not add other additives to your ve- Gather and dispose of the used coolant
hicle’s coolant additive. and additives in accordance with the en-
vironmental protection laws and regula-
• Do not mix the original coolant addi- tions.
tive with other un-recognized cool- Driving speed
ant. Doing so may cause serious
damage to the engine and its cool-
ing system. Hint 6 6
• If the coolant in the expansion tank
becomes faded and the coolant Coolant specification: DF-6, -35 ℃ anti- 40
is not mixed with other coolant of freezing solution
other color, change the coolant as
7
Coolant volume: 6.9 L 20
per the Owner’s Manual.
8 OMA28-0180

Under normal traveling condition, the instru-


ment scale points at middle position. When en-
gine runs at heavy load and the ambient tem-
perature is high, the coolant temperature may
rise and the scale reading increases. When the
coolant temperature is high, warning lamp im-
mediately lights up (please refer to page 38),
to remind or warn the driver to immediately car-
ry out relevant operation. At this moment, stop
the car and turn off the engine. Inspect coolant
level (please refer to page 312).

225

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 310 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

If the coolant level is normal, the system over- Low coolant level
heating may be caused by the radiator fan Warning
failure. Check whether the radiator fan fuse is As shown in figure, first observe coolant tem-
blown. Replace the fuse as needed. perature gauge. If the pointer points at normal Be sure to operate inside the engine com-
zone or lower, it is necessary to immediately fill partment with extra care.
If the indicator comes on just after you drive a coolant.
short distance, immediately stop the vehicle in • As engine compartment is a danger-
a safe place and shut off the engine. Contact ous area, before opening engine
your dealer as soon as possible to have the hood, please carefully read and
cooling system checked and repaired. comply with relevant warnings and
instructions.
• If you need to stop the vehicle due
to technical reasons, be sure to stop
it in a safe place far away the main
lane, and shut off the engine and
turn on the hazard warning lights.
• If you can see the vapor or coolant
escape from the engine compart-
ment, to avoid scalding, do not open
the engine hood. Wait until no vapor
or coolant escapes from the engine
compartment before opening the
hood.

226

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 311 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Checking the coolant level and Check Coolant Level Unscrew and remove the reserve tank cap.
adding coolant
Whether the coolant level is normal or not is
crucial to the proper operation of the engine
cooling system.
ion
Park the vehicle on level ground before open- aut H
ing the engine hood. Be sure to read and follow

ot
the relevant warnings.

ON
MAX
MIN

F
OF

OMA28-0099 OMA28-0112

- Make sure the engine cools down and - Shut off the engine, and wait until it cools
then check whether coolant level is be- down.
tween the MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reserve tank. - To avoid scalding, warp the reserve tank
cap with a big and thick cloth, and then
• MAX—UPPER MARK unscrew and remove the reserve tank
cap with care.
• MIN—LOWER MARK
• The coolant level should be between the
MAX and MIN marks.
- If the coolant level is at or below the MIN
mark, add coolant.

227

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 312 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Adding coolant Close coolant expansion tank cover


Note
- Only add new coolant. - Re-install and tighten the reserve tank
cap.
- If you finish, make sure the coolant level Do not add coolant until the engine cools
is between the MAX and MIN marks and When the engine is cold, the coolant level may down. If you finish, make sure the coolant
above the MIN mark at least. - M a k e exceed the MAX mark slightly. level is at or below the MAX mark. Other-
sure the coolant level is at or below the wise, the excess coolant will spill out of
MAX mark. the cooling system when the engine be-
comes hot.
If the coolant is needed to be added, only
add new coolant. The coolant must be
compliant with this manual. If the DF-6
additive is unavailable temporarily, do not
add other type of additive. If necessary,
you can add pure water temporarily. But,
to restore the normal concentration, you
must add the recommended additive as
required as soon as possible.

228

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 313 2016/7/11 16:05:20


4. Maintenance

Warning Note
Be sure to operate inside the engine com- If too much coolant is consumed, you
partment with extra care. must wait for cooling of engine before fill-
• Read and follow the relevant warn- ing coolant. Otherwise, it may damage en-
ings before starting operation. gine. If too much coolant is consumed, it
indicates that the system has leakage. At
• When the engine is in warm or hot this moment, please contact GAC dealer
condition, the cooling system has to inspect cooling system to avoid dam-
high pressure. At this moment, nev- age of engine.
er open the coolant expansion tank
cover. Doing so may cause serious
scalding to you.

229

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 314 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

4.4.4 Windshield Washer Warning Note


Fluid and Wiper Blades
Be sure to operate inside the engine com- Do not mix the windshield washer fluid
Adding washer fluid partment with extra care. with other detergent. Doing so may cause
• Read and follow the relevant warn- the detergent to be decomposed, blocking
ings before starting operation. the windshield washer nozzle.
• Do not add coolant or other additive
into the washer fluid. Otherwise, oil
stains may be left on the windshield.
This will affect the front vision, seri-
ously, resulting in accidents.

OMA28-0027

Cleaning agent for windshield washer and


cleaning system of headlamp is supplied by
cleaning agent reservoir inside engine com-
partment. Before using windshield cleaning
agent or headlamp cleaning agent (applicable
to some models), if you find the cleaning agent
level is too low, timely fill cleaning agent into
cleaning agent reservoir.
It is hard to clean windows and headlamp by
pure water. So it is necessary to add cleaning
fluid additive approved by our company into
pure water. Please mix cleaning fluid according
to the proportion on the external packing of the
additive.
230

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 315 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

Replace front windshield wiper


blade
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
larly, and Replace them as required. If any
wiper blade is damaged, be sure to replace it
timely.

OMA28-0147 OMA28-0148

- Turn wiper blade by 90° (as shown in the - Hold the wiper blade bracket in the direc-
Figure) to keep it vertical to wiper arm. tion of -arrow- to release the wiper blade.
- Lower the wiper blade holder slowly.

OMA28-0146

- Turn the ignition switch or start switch


from Position LOCK / OFF to Position
ON, and then switch it to Position LOCK
/ OFF.
- If you turn the wiper combination switch
to MIST within 10s after the previous
step, the wiper arm will move half a turn.
- Raise the wiper arm.

231

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 316 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

Your dealer provides the wiper blades for your


vehicle. If your wiper blades need to be re- Warning
placed, we recommend you have your dealer
replace them. Damaged or stained wiper blades can af-
fect the front vision, resulting in reduced
driving safety.
Note • Make sure all the windshields are
clear before driving.
• Do not open the hood when the
wiper arms are raised, or you will • Check the wiper blades and all the
damage the hood and wiper arms. windshields regularly.
• Damaged or stained wiper blades • Replace the wiper blades once or
can scratch the windshield easily. twice a year.

OMA28-0149

- Install a new wiper blade with the same


length and specification as the old one
onto the wiper arm in reverse order of
dismantling.
- If you finish, lower the wiper arm gently
down against the windshield.
- Turn the ignition switch or start switch to
"ON" position, wiper arm will reset auto-
matically.

232

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 317 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

4.4.5 Brake fluid Brake fluid level - If the fluid level is at or below the MIN
mark, add fluid.
Check the brake fluid level regularly as per the
Function of brake fluid Warranty Booklet. Before opening the bonnet carefully read and
comply with the relevant warnings (see page
The brake fluid is used to transfer power in the 76).
hydraulic brake system. If you cannot check the brake fluid level directly
because the reservoir is blocked by other parts
in the engine compartment, if necessary, have
MAX
your dealer check the fluid level. For the posi-
tion of brake fluid tank of your car, please see
relevant illustration of engine shown in "Techni-
cal data" of this manual. Brake fluid tank cover
MIN is yellow-and-black.
The brake pads can be adjusted automatically
due to wear during usage, so the brake fluid
level will drop a little. This is normal.
However, if the brake fluid level drops signifi-
OMA28-0098
cantly or below the MIN mark in a short time,
this indicates the brake system leaks. In this
- Check whether the brake fluid level is case, immediately stop your vehicle in a safe
between the MAX and MIN marks on the place. Do not continue to drive. Contact your
side of the reservoir when the engine dealer as soon as possible to have your brake
cools down. system checked.
• MAX—UPPER MARK
• MIN—LOWER MARK
• The brake fluid level should be between
the MAX and MIN marks.

233

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 318 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

Change the brake fluid


Warning Note
Replace the brake fluid as per the requirements
• Read and follow the warnings be- of the Warranty Booklet. The brake fluid is corrosive to the body
fore opening the engine hood. paint. If you get brake fluid on the body
• If the warning lamp of brake system paint, wipe it off timely.
constantly lights up or lights up dur-
ing traveling, it may be because the ALE
D CONTAINER
(+).
SE
brake fluid level in the tank is too OM ke fluid(+) .N
W
Hint
low. To prevent accident, once there bra

AR
FR

NIN
oti
T4
D
is such condition, immediately stop

ce

G:
BRAKE FLUI
r DO
Be sure to collect and dispose of the used

: Clean the

CLEAN FILLER
the car and never continue to drive

ly fo
the car. Please contact GAC dealer brake fluid in accordance with the envi-

n
ronmental regulations.

d, o
for inspecting the system.

T 4

rot
ne
DO

a
tin

CA
gc e
ab before op L

P
Y
BE
ON E
FO
R
E RE
MOVING. US
Hint
Brake fluid specification: DOT4 composite
OMA28-0155 brake fluid.
Total volume of brake fluid: 0.72~0.75 L.
Your vehicle’s brake fluid is developed specially
for your vehicle’s brake system. To ensure
the brake system is functioning properly, we
recommend you have your dealer change the
brake fluid.
The brake fluid is water-absorbing. It can ab-
sorb moisture from the air around constantly
in the process of usage. Excessive moisture
content in the brake fluid with will corrode the
brake system, greatly reduce the boiling point
of the brake fluid and reduce the braking effect.

234

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 319 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

Warning • You must replace brake fluid ac-


cording to the schedule specified in
Maintenance Manual, because if the
The use of waste brake fluid or brake fluid brake fluid stays inside the system
unsuitable for your car may greatly re- for a long time, air lock will be pro-
duce brake effect. And even cause failure duced inside the pipeline of braking
of braking system. system. In this case, it will reduce
• The brake fluid container is labeled brake effect and driving safety, and
with the specifications. Always use even cause complete failure of brak-
the brake fluid with correct specifi- ing system and accidents.
cations.
• The brake fluid is toxic.
• Do not store the brake fluid in a
food container or other non-original
container to avoid confusing, result-
ing in poisoning! Store the brake
fluid in its original sealed container
and store it in a safe place. Keep it
clear out of the reach of children!
Avoid poisoning.

235

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 320 2016/7/11 16:05:21


4. Maintenance

4.4.6 Battery Charging system warning lamp Removing the battery cover plate
This warning light indicates the generator fail- Battery may be located under cover plate 1 or
Alert symbols and descriptions for ure. inside housing 1.
operation of the battery The warning light or start switch comes on - Open engine compartment cover.
when you turn the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition, and it goes out when the engine operat- - If the battery is installed underneath the
1. Always wear goggles when ing. cover plate, press the latching tongue
operating! and raise the cover plate, and then re-
If the warning light comes on when the vehicle move the cover plate.
2. The battery electrolyte is is moving, this indicates that the generator
cannot charge the battery. Go to your dealer to - If the battery is installed in the outer
corrosive. Be sure to wear cover, turn the outer cover to one side.
protective gloves and goggles have the electrical system checked as soon as
when operating! possible.
Warning
3. Make sure the workplace is
free of open flames, sparks, Warning
un-covered lights and smoke! • Do not open the battery
Ignoring the warning light and the relevant • Beware of chemical burns and bat-
warnings can cause the vehicle damage tery explosion.
4. The battery gives off explosive and personal injury or death.
hydrogen gas during charging! • Damaged or leaked battery isn't
allowed to connect. Damaged or
leaked battery should be recovered
5. Keep the electrolyte and according to law of environment
battery out of the reach of chil- protection.
dren!
• Before operation, carefully read and
Unless you know the operational process and comply with relevant safety warning
have proper equipment, do not perform any and instructions about the operation
operation on your vehicle’s electrical system. of battery.
Otherwise, you should have this done by your
dealer.

236

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 321 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Check the battery. Charging battery and replace bat-


Warning tery
If you drive your car to a long distance, or use
your car or battery on hot area for a long time, • Before operation, carefully read and Do not perform operation on the battery unless
please regularly inspect battery capacity. comply with relevant safety warning you are professional enough.
and instructions about the operation
of battery. If you often drive for short distances or store
• Do not open the battery. Beware of your vehicle for an extended period of time,
chemical burns and battery explo- maintain your battery more frequently.
sion. If the battery is damaged or capacity is insuf-
• Damaged or leaked battery isn't ficient, it may be very difficult to start a car. In
allowed to connect. Damaged or this case, we recommend you have your dealer
leaked battery should be recovered charge or replace the battery.
according to law of environment
protection.
• Make sure the workplace is free of Note
open flames, sparks, un-covered
lights and smoke. When operating Use only the electrical equipment in line
the cables and electrical equipment, with the national electromagnetic compat-
OMA28-0137 be sure to prevent sparks and static ibility norms and approved by GAC Motor.
electricity. Do not allow the battery
- Reveal the battery cover. terminals to be short-circuited. Oth-
erwise, high-energy sparks due to
- Check the battery connectors and ca- short-circuit may injure the opera-
bles. If corrosion or looseness is detect- tor!
ed, go to your GAC MOTOR Trumpchi
dealer for inspection and maintenance
as soon as possible.

237

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 322 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Charging battery Replace battery


Hint
Unless you have the knowledge and the con- Your battery is installed properly and safely.
trolled environment, have your dealer charge • When you connect the battery to the
your battery. The genuine battery can meet the vehicle electrical system, the ESP warning
maintenance, performance and safety require- light will be illuminated.
The battery can still discharge quickly if the ments.
ignition switch is ON for an extended period of • The warning light should go out
time after the engine shutdown, or the width Read and follow the safety warnings related to after the vehicle drives a short dis-
lamps or parking signal lamps are ON for an operating the battery before starting work. tance at 15~20 km/h.
extended period of time after parking.
1. Do not use the electrical equipment for Note Note
an extended period of time after the en-
gine shutdown. • If the battery needs to be replaced,
select the recommended battery Whenever the battery is disconnected and
2. When you leaving the vehicle, be sure to re-connected, operation needs to be per-
close the doors tightly and turn off all the (see Page 339). Failure to do so can
cause improper operation of the formed on self-learning of the start-stop
electrical equipment (e.g., lights, etc.) system:
start-stop system. Go to your GAC
3. If the engine can't be started when the MOTOR GS4 dealer for replacement. 1. Turn off the ignition switch or start
electrical devices are using, don't contin- • To avoid damaging your vehicle’s switch and all in-vehicle electrical
uously start the engine. You should wait electrical system, do not connect equipment, and let the vehicle sit for
for 5-10min before re-starting the engine. the solar panels or battery charger over 4h.
If the engine still can't be started, please and other power generation equip- 2. Start the vehicle 3 times, and let it
contact GAC dealer for overhauling. ment to the 12 V power outlet or operate continuously for at least 1
cigarette lighter. minute each time.
• As the battery contains toxic ma-
terials such as sulfuric acid and
lead, it must be disposed carefully
and don't take it just as a common
household waste.

238

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 323 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

4.4.7 Wheels Tire Storage Conditions New Tires


- Make a mark on the tire to indicate the New tire must be run in.
Prevention Measures for Wheel direction of rotation before removing the
tire. Re-install the tire according to the The new tire tread pattern depth depends on
Failure tire brand, model and type.
mark to keep the direction of rotation of
- To cross over curbs or similar obstacles, the wheel and the dynamic balance state
slow down your vehicle and drive in the unchanged.
vertical direction of the obstacle. - Store the removed wheel and tire in a
- Prevent the tires from touching grease, cool and dry place. You’d better store
oil and fuel. them in a shaded place without direct
sunlight.
- Regularly check the condition of the tire
for cuts, cracks or bulges, and remove - Let the tire uninstalled to the wheel sit
the foreign objects in the tire tread. upright.

239

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 324 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Hidden damage • Do not use any tire which is dam-


Warning
Usually, it is difficult to detect the tire and rim aged or worn down to its wear indi-
damage. When the vehicle is running, if you cators. Be sure to replace it timely.
You cannot get the adhesion from a new
feel it vibrates abnormally or pulls to one side, tire during the first 500 km, so, drive your • Try to avoid using a tire more than
this indicates a trouble develops in a certain vehicle at a moderate speed with care. To six years old. If necessary, be sure
tire. If this happens, drive your vehicle to your prevent accidents. to drive at low speed with extra
dealer to have the tires checked. care.
• The tire which has not been run in
or has been damaged provides in- • Do not use any old wheel and tire
sufficient adhesion, directly affect- of dubious background under any
ing the braking effect. circumstances. Such wheel and tire,
which can be damaged invisibly, will
• Don't use damaged tires; otherwise, cause loss of control while driving,
it may cause accidents. Because resulting in accidents.
the damaged tires during traveling
may be blown and cause traffic ac- • When the vehicle is running, if you
cidents and injure persons. feel it vibrates abnormally or pulls
to one side, be sure to stop the
• Tire pressure must comply with vehicle in a safe place immediately
specifications; otherwise, it may and check the tires for damage.
cause accidents. If the tire is un-
derinflated, high-speed driving will
cause tire deflection, resulting in
tire overheating which may lead to
tire peeling off or burst.

240

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 325 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Check tire pressure Tire pressure


Hint
The standard pressures of the original tires are If the protective cap is lost, be sure to re-install
also given on the tire information label below For some models, the cluster screen can a new one.
the B-pillar on the driver’s side. display current tire pressure.
Unless the vehicle drove several kilometers at
- Look up data label to find out tire pres- low speed in the past 3 hours, you can check
sure suitable for this car (pressure listed and adjust the tire pressure. When the vehicle
is suitable for tires in summer and win- is running, the friction and deflection deforma-
ter). tion in the tire cause the tire temperature rise
and air expansion, resulting in inaccurate in-
- Unscrew and remove the protective cap spection of tire pressure. Check the pressure in
from the valve stem. the tires when they are cold.
- Install the tire pressure gauge to the The tire pressure described in this manual is
valve stem. based on the cold tire pressure in summer and
- Check the pressure in the tires when winter. The hot tire pressure will be higher than
they are cold. If you check the pressure the cold tire pressure. If the cold tire pressure
when the tires are hot, you will see read- meets the specification, do not let air out when
ings slightly higher than the cold reading. the tire becomes hot. Otherwise, the tire will be
This is normal. Do not let air out to match underinflated, resulting in tire burst when the
the specified cold pressure. vehicle is moving.

- Adjust the tire pressure according the Whether the tire pressure is normal or not is
vehicle’s load. crucial when the vehicle moving at high speed.
Therefore, check the pressure in the tires when
- Remember to check the spare tire or refueling and before long-distance driving.
emergency tire at the same time you Keep the pressure in the spare tire and the
check all the other tires. emergency spare tire up to the maximum pres-
sure specified by your vehicle.
- Re-install and tighten the protective cap
of the valve stem.

241

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 326 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Tire Service Life


Warning Warning
The service life of your tires is dependent on
• Improper tire pressure can cause many factors, including, but not limited to, driv- For vehicles equipped with tire pressure
tire burst, resulting in accidents, ing habits and tire assembly. monitoring system, tire change or replace-
personal injury or even death. ment should be carried out by GAC dealer.
• Check the pressure in the tires once
a month at least and before long-
distance driving. Make sure the tire
pressure meets the specification.
Beware of accidents.
• Underinflated tires will exacerbate
tire deflection, resulting in tire over-
heating which may lead to tire peel-
ing off or burst.
• Both underinflated tires and over-
inflated tires wear unevenly, and
adversely affect handling.
OMA28-0028

If the front tires wear more seriously than the


rear tires do, we recommend you move the
tires to the positions shown in the illustration
each time they are rotated, thereby increasing
tire life and distributing wear more evenly.

242

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 327 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Tread wear indicators Tire pressure Wheel balance


Incorrect tire pressure can cause premature The tires were properly balanced by the fac-
tire wear and tire burst. Therefore, check the tory. The balance of your tires is dependent on
pressure in the tires once a month and before many factors which can cause wheel imbal-
long-distance driving. ance and front-wheel shimmy.
You should timely treat and balance the unbal-
Note anced tires. Failure to do so can cause the
steering system, suspension system and tires
to wear out faster.
Sudden cornering, sudden acceleration
and emergency braking can cause your A tire should always be rebalanced if it is re-
tires to wear out faster. Try to avoid them. moved from the wheel.

OMA28-0150

Your vehicle’s tires have wear indicators (1.6


mm deep) molded into the tread. Generally,
you can see the tread wear indicator in six or
eight places around the tire, depending on the
tire brand. In addition, several marks (e.g.,
“TWI” or other symbols used to indicate the
places of the wear indicators) are found on the
sidewall of the tire. If the tire wears down to the
tread depth of 1.6 m, replace the tire.

243

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 328 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Incorrect Wheel Alignment Specifications of Rims and Tires Spare tire:


Incorrect wheel alignment will cause uneven Rim: Non-full-size tire
tire wear and reduce driving safety. If you find
a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check 6.0 J x 16 (aluminum alloy) (applicable to some
the wheel alignment. models) Hint
6.5 J x 17 (aluminum alloy) (applicable to some The tire information label is located below
models) the B-pillar on the driver’s side. Select the
tires based on the recommended size and
7.0 J x 18 (aluminum alloy) (applicable to some type on the whim or tire information label.
models)
Tire:
215/65 R16 (applicable to some models)
215/60 R17 (applicable to some models)
215/55 R18 (applicable to some models)

244

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 329 2016/7/11 16:05:22


4. Maintenance

Warning • Be sure to replace the damaged 4.4.8 Anti-theft maintenance


wheel and tire in time. description
When the vehicle is running, tire burst or • Do not use any old wheel and tire
air leakage can cause serious traffic acci- of dubious background under any
circumstances. Such wheel and tire, When using it normally, if you have problems,
dents. contact local dealers.
which can be damaged invisibly, will
• When the tire wears down to the cause loss of control while driving,
wear indicators, replace the tire. resulting in accidents.
Failure to do so can cause acci-
dents.
• If the tires are underinflated, contin-
uous high-speed driving will exacer-
bate tire deflection, resulting in tire
overheating which may lead to tire
peeling off or burst. As unsuitable
tire pressure is easy to cause acci-
dent, the tire pressure must comply
with specifications.
• If you detect any tire wears uneven-
ly, have your dealer check it as soon
as possible.
• Always prevent your tires from
touching chemicals, oil, grease, fuel
and brake fluid.
• Try to avoid using a tire more than
six years old. If necessary, be sure
to drive at low speed with extra
care.

245

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 330 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

5.1 Identification
5.

Numbers

4AXXXX
XXXXXXX
Vehicle identification number (VIN) can be read
from the VIN code attached on the left lower
corner of front windshield, or vehicles name-
plate attached under the front passenger's pil-
lar B. XX
LMGAAXXXXXXXXXX

OMA28-0133 OMA28-0181
Guangzhou Automobile Group Motor
CO., LTD Manufacture
*XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX* Model:GACXXXXXXX The vehicle identification number (VIN) (in- The engine number (indicated by the arrow)
Brand: GS4 (Trumpchi) Engine model:XXXXXX dicated by the arrow) is stamped on the rear is stamped on the position where the engine
Discharge capacity of engine:XXXXmL Rated power:XXXXKw engine partition below the water tank. block is connected to the transmission.
Maximum design weight:XXXXKg Person capacity: xx:

Manufacturing date:XXXX Year XX Month Manufacturing country: China

OMA28-0111

The vehicle information label, as shown in the


icon, contains the following information:
1. VIN, Model
2. Brand, Engine Model
3. Engine displacement and rated power
4. Total mass, Occupant capacity
5. Date of manufacture, Origin

246

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 331 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

5.2 Vehicle parameters Parameters


Item
Dimension Numerical value Unit

Length 4510±45 mm

Width 1852±18 mm

1677±16 (no roof


rack)
High (no-load) mm
1708±17 (roof
rack))

Wheelbase 2650±26 mm
18° 21°

Front 1575±15 mm
935±9 (mm) 2650±26 (mm) 925±9 (mm) wheel
4510±44 (mm)
Tread
Rear 1570±15 mm
wheel

Front mounting 935±9 mm

Rear mounting 925±9 mm

1708±17 (mm)
Minimum ground
clearance (full ≥155 mm
load)

≥155 (mm) Approach angle ≥18 °


1575±15 (mm) (full load)
1852±18 (mm) 1570±15 (mm)
Departure angle
OMA28-0102 ≥21 °
(full load)

247

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 332 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Quality

Vehicle curb weight (kg) Max. total mass (kg)


Model
Front axle Rear axle Maximum Front axle Rear axle
Curb weight load load gross mass load load

GAC6450A1A5, GAC6450A2A5, 1450±43 839±25 611±18 1900 969 931


GAC6450A1A5A, GAC6450A2A5A

GAC6450A1C5, GAC6450A2C5, 1475±44 864±26 611±18 1900 969 931


GAC6450A1C5A, GAC6450A2C5A

GAC6450A1D5, GAC6450A2D5, GAC6450A1D5A, 1465±43 850±25 615±18 1900 969 931


GAC6450A2D5A

GAC6450A1F5, GAC6450A1F5A 1475±44 870±26 605±18 1900 969 931

GAC6450A2F5, GAC6450A2F5A 1500±45 880±26 620±18 1900 969 931

248

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 333 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Integrated parameters

Corresponding(1.3t) model parameter


Item GAC6450A1A5, GA- GAC6450A1A5A, GA- GAC6450A1C5, GA- GAC6450A1C5A, Unit
C6450A2A5 C6450A2A5A C6450A2C5 GAC6450A2C5A
Number of occupants 5 Person
Minimum turning diameter ≤10.6 m
Maximum speed ≥180 km/h
Fuel consumption in downtown ≤8.5 ≤7.7 ≤8.0 ≤7.4 L/100km
Fuel consumption in suburbs ≤5.6 ≤5.5 ≤5.7 ≤5.6 L/100km
Fuel consumption (comprehensive) ≤6.7 ≤6.4 ≤6.5 ≤6.3 L/100km

Corresponding(1.5T) model parameter


Item GAC6450A1D5, GAC6450A1D5A, GAC6450A1F5, GA- GAC6450A2F5, GA- Unit
GAC6450A2D5 GAC6450A2D5A C6450A1F5A C6450A2F5A
Number of occupants 5 Person
Minimum turning diameter ≤10.6 m
Maximum speed ≥180 km/h
Fuel consumption in downtown ≤8.6 ≤8.0 ≤8.1 ≤7.5 L/100km
Fuel consumption in suburbs ≤5.7 ≤5.7 ≤5.8 ≤5.8 L/100km
Fuel consumption (comprehensive) ≤6.7 ≤6.5 ≤6.6 ≤6.4 L/100km

249

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 334 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Engine parameters

Corresponding(1.3t) model parameter


Engine
GAC6450A1A5, GAC6450A2A5, GAC6450A1A5A, GAC6450A2A5AGAC6450A1C5, GA-
C6450A2C5, GAC6450A1C5A, GAC6450A2C5A
Model 4A13M1

Layout pattern Front-transverse mounted


Gasoline engine, spark ignition type, inline, 4-cylinder, 4-stroke, water-cooled, multi-point EFI,
Type turbo charging
Number of cylinders 4

Ignition order 1—3—4—2

Cylinder bore (mm) 75

Stroke (mm) 75

Displacement (ml) 1325

Compression ratio 9.8: 1

Rated power / speed (kW / (r / min)) 101/5500

Maximum torque /speed (N • m / (r/min)) 202/1500~4200

Stable idling speed (r/min) 700±50 (A/C turned off), 730±50 (A/C turned on)

250

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 335 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Corresponding(1.5T) model parameter


Engine
GAC6450A1D5, GAC6450A2D5, GAC6450A1D5A, GAC6450A2D5AGAC6450A1F5, GAC6450A-
1F5A, GAC6450A2F5, GAC6450A2F5A

Model 4A15M1

Layout pattern Front-transverse mounted


Gasoline engine, spark ignition type, inline, 4-cylinder, 4-stroke, water-cooled, multi-point EFI,
Type turbo charging
Number of cylinders (PCS) 4

Ignition order 1—3—4—2

Cylinder bore (mm) 75

Stroke (mm) 84.6

Displacement (ml) 1495

Compression ratio 9.8, 1

Rated power / speed (kW / (r / min)) 112/5000

Maximum torque /speed (N • m / (r/min)) 235/1450~4250

Stable idling speed (r/min) 700±50 (A/C turned off), 730±50 (A/C turned on)

251

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 336 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Transmission parameters Tire

Transmission - 215/65 R16 (optional)


Corresponding vehicle cations 215/55 R18 (1.5T model with assembly,1.3T model (optional)
model parameters
Model Type Drive Front wheel Rear wheel
Tire
pres-
GAC6450A1A5, sure 220 kPa 220 kPa
GAC6450A2A5,
GAC6450A1A5A, Manual, The standard pressures of the original tires are also given on the tire in-
F041E FWD formation label below the B-pillar on the driver’s side.
GAC6450A2A5A, 5-speed
GAC6450A1D5A,
GAC6450A2D5A
Liquid
GAC6450A1C5,

GAC6450A2C5, Item

Fuel Please refer to the description on the fuel


GAC6450A1C5A, requirement lable at the fuel filler door of
each vehicle.
GAC6450A2C5A, GA- C725 Dual-clutch, FWD Engine Coolant DF-6, -35℃ anti-freezing solution
C6450A1F5, (G-DCT) 7-speed

GAC6450A1F5A,
Engine oil above
Oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
GAC6450A2F5,
MT oil 75W-90 (Rishi Mitsubishi)
GAC6450A2F5A
G-DCT transmission oil ZC 601FF (PETRONAS)
GAC6450A1D5, Manual,
F041E2 FWD -
GAC6450A2D5 5-speed DOT4
els with MT
- DOT4
els with G-DCT

252

2016/7/11 16:05:23
5. Technical Data

Volume Suspension

Fuel tank 50 L Front Rear


Form
Engine Coolant 1) 6.9 L McPherson independent sus- Multi-link independent sus-
pension pension
Replace (not including filter) 4L
Steering gear
2)
Engine oil Replace (including filter) 4.2 L
Rack and pinion type electric
Form
Capacity 4.5 L power steering

Replacement 2.3 L
M/T oil Clutch
Capacity 2.5 L
Dry, single diaphragm spring, hydraulic as-
Form (MT)
Replacement 1.7 L sisted
G-DCT transmission oil Dry, dual-clutch, electronically controlled hy-
Capacity 2L Type (G-DCT) draulic control
Brake fluid for vehicle Capacity 0.75 L
models with MT
Brake
Brake fluid for vehicle Capacity 0.72 L
models with G-DCT
Hydraulic vacuum booster, dual-pipe X-shaped
Form
Windshield washer reservoir 2.5~3.5 L layout
Front wheel Floating caliper, ventilated, disc brakes
1)
Note: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that Caliper disc brake and drum brake combina-
remaining in the engine. Rear wheel tion
2)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Mechanical flexible-shaft control is applied to
Parking brake the rear brakes (optional EPB).

253

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 338 2016/7/11 16:05:23


5. Technical Data

Wheel balancing value Wheel alignment number

The residual amount Description Parameters


Description of dynamic unbal-
ance Front wheel camber -20′±30′
Inside ≤8g Toe-in of front single
Front wheel 5′±3′
wheel
Outside ≤8g Front wheel
Kingpin caster angle 7°37′±30′
Inside ≤8g
Rear wheel Kingpin inclination 12°35′±30′
Outside ≤8g angle
Rear wheel camber -1°5′±30′
Rear wheel
Toe-in of rear single
Free play of brake pedal wheel 6′±5′

Description Parameters
Battery
Stroke ≤ 100mm

Free stroke ≤ 11mm VARTA AGM H5 or


Model VARTA AGM LN2
Rated voltage 12 V
Technical parameters of brake linings
Fuse
Description Parameters

Wear limit, front brake lining (excluding its backing plate) 2 mm Instrument panel fuse box (Please see page 350)

Wear limit, rear brake lining (excluding its backing plate) 2 mm Front compartment fuse box (Please see page 350)

254

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 339 2016/7/11 16:05:24


5. Technical Data

Lights

Halogen Low Beam H7 55W


Headlamp Xenon Low Beam D3S 25W
Halogen High beam H7 55W
LED rear position lamp /brake lamp Cannot be replaced individually
Front turn signal Lamp 12V H21W
Front position light(LED) Cannot be replaced individually
Front fog lamp H8 12V 35W
Fog lamp, rear 12V PY21W
Side turn signal (LED) 12V 0.5W
Rear turn signal Lamp 12V W16W
Reverse lamp 12V W16W
License plate lamp 12V W5W
High-mount brake light(LED) Cannot be replaced individually
Ceiling lights, front 12V 8W
Ceiling lights, rear 12V 8W
Trunk lights 12V 10W
Vanity mirror lights 12V 5W
Daytime running light 12V 3W
For vehicles equipped with xenon headlamps (low beam), the replace-
ment of bulb should be carried out by GAC dealer.

255

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 340 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

6.1 Tool Kit and Spare Note Warning


Tire After the use of jack, please put special Using the jack improperly can cause seri-
wrench for jack and jack into toolkit in ous injury.
sequence. The jack should be supported
Driver's tool with proper angle before being put into
• Only place the jack on solid and
level ground.
the toolkit (angle between upper and low-
er support arms is 80~90°). • Only use your jack to jack up your
vehicle. Do not use your jack to jack
38000038AD000
YONGJIA D232

up other weight or vehicle.


• Do not start the engine when your
>PE-HD<

Warning vehicle is on the jack. Doing so can


cause accidents.
Press

• Tighten the wheel bolts to the speci- • To lessen the risk of personal injury,
fied torque. do not put any part of your body un-
Min.: 100m

Max.:200m

• Failure to do so cause the bolts der the vehicle when the vehicle is
become loose when the vehicle is on the jack.
Front Side

moving, resulting in accidents. • Place the appropriate protective


• Be sure to tighten the wheel bolts support under the vehicle before
1 2 3 4 5 6 with the special wrench. getting under the vehicle.
OMA28-0029

The on-board tools include the following:


1. Jack
2. Warning triangle
3. Towing ring
4. Double-purpose screw driver (applicable
to some models)
5. Removal wrench for wheel bolts
6. Special wrench for jack

256

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 341 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

Spare tire - Screw the central hand wheel clockwise


and tighten the flat tire. Warning
The spare tire is placed under the trunk floor. If
necessary, take out it. - Put the trunk floor cushion and then
place the carpet to original position. • Use it according to operating re-
quirements of spare tire to avoid
- Close the trunk lid. disk.
• It is forbidden to install more than
one spare tire.
Note • Do not use the spare tire which has
been damaged or wears down to the
Spare tire has been inflated; check the wear indicators.
pressure regularly to ensure the maximum
pressure and check it many times a year. • If your spare tire is over six years
old, only use it in emergency with
extra care.
• If you finish installing the spare tire,
check its pressure and make sure it
is within the specified range.
OMA28-0140 • When using spare tire, the speed
cannot exceed 80km/h, abrupt ac-
celeration and emergent brake shall
Open the trunk lid. be avoided. Standard tire shall be
- Take the trunk carpet completely out. installed as far as possible.

- Take the tool kit out of the trunk.


- Unscrew the central hand wheel of spare
tire.
- Take out spare tire.
- Align the central hole of the flat tire to the
bolt in the spare tire well and place it in
position.

257

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 342 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

6.2 Use of warning


triangle Note
Use the warning triangles properly follow-
ing the national laws and regulations.

1
OMA28-0030

OMA28-0118 - Take the warning triangle out of trunk


floor and unfold it to use.
- The warning triangle - 1 - is located on
the top of trunk floor.

258

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 343 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

6.3 Changing a Flat Warning


Unscrewing the wheel nuts

Tire • If you have a flat tire while driving,


pull over safely to change it.
Preparations • Park your vehicle in an area far
away from traffic lanes. Turn on the
- Park the vehicle on firm and level ground hazard warning lights, and place the
far away from traffic lanes. warning triangles in position.
- Turn ignition switch to "LOCK" /"OFF" • Follow the relevant laws and regula-
position to turn on hazard warning lamp. tions.
• Park the vehicle on firm and level
Adjusting the shift lever position: ground. Place a solid block below
the jack as needed.
Put the transmission in reverse (manual) or
Park (automatic). • Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle while you change the tire. OMA28-0141
- Exert parking brake.
Try to unload the weight in the vehicle. Seek- Take dismounting wrench for wheel bolts out of
ing appropriate object to block the wheel (Note: vehicle tool box. Loosen each wheel nut 1 turn
which is diagonally opposite to the tire being counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
changed) to help prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing when you change a tire.
- Take out spare tire and vehicle tools

259

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 344 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

Jacking up the vehicle - Crank the jack until its notch contacts the
Warning jacking point on the bottom of the vehicle
body.
• Only loosen each wheel nut 1 turn
when the vehicle is on the jack.
• Only use the wheel nut wrench to
unscrew the wheel nuts.

OMA28-0197

OMA28-0198
- Turn ignition switch to "LOCK" /"OFF"
position to turn on hazard warning lamp.
- Check whether the jack is placed steadi-
- Exert parking brake and move the shift ly and fits the ground tightly.
lever to other position: Put the transmis-
sion in reverse (manual) or Park (auto- - Crank the jack up with the driver’s tools
matic). and lift the vehicle until the tire off the
ground.
- Find the jacking point nearest the wheel
you are removing. Place the jack under
the jacking point.

260

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 345 2016/7/11 16:05:24


6. Accident Handling

Remove the wheels Installing the spare tire


Note
- Remove the wheel nuts with the wrench - Put on the spare tire.
Loosen the bolts of wheel you are remov- with the flat tire off ground.
ing, and then jack up the wheel and do - Put all wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
subsequent replacement for easy removal - Remove the wheels. then tighten them in a crisscross pattern
of the wheel bolts. with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel
is firmly against the hub. Do not try to
tighten the wheel nuts fully.
- Lower the car.
Warning
- Use the dismounting wrench for wheel
• Make sure the jack is on firm and bolts to tighten all wheel bolts.
level ground.
• Make sure the jack is placed under
the proper jacking point. Note
• Follow the precautions for operating Paying attention to the direction of rota-
the jack. tion of the tire.
• Disconnect your vehicle from the
trailer (if equipped).
• When you raise the vehicle, continu-
ally observe the condition of the
vehicle. If you observe the vehicle
inclines obviously, stop raising it
and find out the cause before trying
again.

261

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 346 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

Precautions for changing a flat tire


Note
• Install the flat tire into the flat tire well
• Tighten them in accordance with di- timely.
agonal sequence.
• Clean the tools and store the tools in the
• Wheel bolt tightening torque is tool kit case.
125±13 N·m.
• If you finish, have the wheel bolt • Check the wheel bolts torque as soon as
torque checked at your dealer. possible.
• When replacing the wheel, if any • Change the damaged tire as soon as
bolt rusts or is difficult to be tight- possible.
ened, be sure to replace the bolt
checking the bolt torque and clean • When replacing the tire, if any nut is cor-
the threaded holes. and clean the roded or difficult to loosen, replace it be-
threaded holes. fore checking the wheel nut torque, and
clean the threaded hole.

Warning Note
Keep the threads of the wheel bolts and Be sure to secure the spare tire/emergen-
hub clean, and make sure the nuts can be cy tire or the flat tire in the trunk reliably.
screwed easily. No grease or other attach-
ment is permitted.

262

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 347 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

6.4. Fuse
Fuses in the electrical box of dash- Fuses in electrical box of engine Replace the fuse.
board compartment

O
L R
A
OFF

3
2

OFF

OMA28-0031

OMA28-0050 OMA28-0136
- Pull out or re-install the required fuse us-
ing the puller in the electrical box of the
- Open the storage compartment of the - Open engine compartment cover (refer
to page 76). engine compartment.
lower guard in the cab and pull it out.
- You can see the electrical box for the - Press fixing clip in arrow direction and
instrument panel and its fuses inside. release fuse box cover.
- Remove the fuse box cover upward, and
then you can seen the fuses on the elec-
trical box of the engine compartment.

263

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 348 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

Fuse blown

Warning Note
• Do not reuse any fuse. Turn off all the electrical equipment before
• Do not use the fuse with higher rat- replacing the fuses.
ing. Doing so may cause damage to
1 other components of the electrical
system.
• Make sure the color and mark of the
replacement fuse are the same as
those of the original one.
• Do not use a sheet metal, paper clip
to replace the fuse.
OMA28-0032
• Keep the inside of the fuse box
clean. Prevent the fuse box from be-
- If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new ing dampened.
of the same color and mark (We recom-
mend you have your dealer replace the
fuse).

264

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 349 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

6.5 Configuration of
fuses Hint
Configuring the fuses in the under-
hood fuse box
Configuring the fuses in the inte- An electrical device may be equipped with
rior fuse box under the dashboard several fuses, or several electrical devices
share one fuse. EF20 EF13 EF12 EF11 EF10 EF9

EF21

EF1
EF22

EF23 ER03 ER02 ER01

EF24

Note
EF25

EF26 ER06 ER05 ER04

IF17 IF10 EF27


EF2

IF16 IF9 EF28


IR1

IR2

IR3

ER09 ER08 ER07

You have to have some fuses replaced by


IF15 EF29 EF3
IF8
EF30
IF7

your dealer. For more information, consult


IF14 EF31 EF4
IF41 IF35 IF29 IF6 EF32 ER11 ER10
IF44

your dealer.
EF5
IF40 IF34 IF28 IF13 IF5 EF33
IR6

IR7

IF43
IF39 IF33 IF27 IF4 EF6

EF19

EF18

EF17

EF16

EF15

EF14

EF8

EF7
IF42 ER16
IF38 IF32 IF26 IF12 IF3
EF34
IF37 IF31 IF25 IF2
IF11 EF35
IF36 IF30 IF24 IF1
IR4

IR5

EF36 ER15 ER14 ER13 ER12

EF37
IF23

IF22

IF21

IF20

IF19

IF18

IP55

OMA28-0182

OMA28-0183 The pictures are not applicable to each model.


To learn the purposes of the fuses, check your
own vehicle. The fuses depend on the vehicle
The pictures are not applicable to each model. model.
To learn the purposes of the fuses, check your
own vehicle. The fuses depend on the vehicle
model.

265

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 350 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

Hint Note Warning


An electrical device may be equipped with You have to have some fuses replaced by Using an inappropriate or repaired fuse
several fuses, or several electrical devices your dealer. For more information, consult can cause a fire or personal injury or
share one fuse. your dealer. death.

266

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 351 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

6.6 Replace bulbs If you find any bulbs are burned


Note
out, replace them as soon as pos-
Safe Operation Instructions for Re- sible. Only replace the burned-out bulb with
placing the Lights a new one of the same rating. The bulb
Before replacing the bulb, be sure to check the specification is marked on the bulb glass
relevant fuse. The blown fuse can cause the or the socket.
Check the following lights: light failure. In addition, you should do the fol-
1. Front headlamp (low and high beam) lowing: i.e.:
2. Front / rear LED position lights 1. Turn the light switch to the OFF position. LL = long-lasting bulbs, their life is longer than
that of a standard bulb.
3. LED brake lamp 2. Move the light control lever to the middle
position. Blue = blue/white bulbs, matching with the
4. Turn signal light color of gas discharge lamps (Xenon).
3. To shut off the engine, turn the igni-
5. Side turn signal lamp tion switch or start switch to “LOCK “ or
“OFF”.
6. Reverse lamp
7. Hazard warning lamp
8. License plate lamp
9. High-mounted brake lamp
10. Front/rear fog light

267

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 352 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

When replacing a headlight bulb, protect the


glass from contact with your fingers. Otherwise, Warning
the bulb heat may evaporate your perspiration
and make it condense on the bulb reflector, re- Unless you have the knowledge about the
ducing the headlight illumination. If you finish, operational process, safe operation speci-
check the headlight operating condition. If you fications and the tools, have your dealer
replace the headlight bulb, have your dealer replace the bulb.
adjust the headlight aiming.
• Turn off the relevant switch and let
the bulb cool down before replacing
it.
• During operation, pay attention to
the sharp components on the un-
derhood headlight housing and the
combination taillight housing. Be
sure to protect your hands from be-
ing scratched.
• Special attention should be paid
when operating high-voltage parts
of gas discharge bulb. Improper
operation may cause injuries or
deaths. For details, please consult
GAC dealer.

268

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 353 2016/7/11 16:05:25


6. Accident Handling

6.7 Emergency start Note


Connect the positive terminals of the batteries
before connecting the negative ones.

Jumper cable When jump starting, protect the disabled


vehicle from contacting the booster ve-
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may hicle. Otherwise, once the positive termi-
be able to start the engine by using a booster nals of the two batteries are connected,
battery, that is, start the engine by connecting the current is turned on immediately.
the battery on a booster vehicle to that on the
disabled vehicle through jumper cables.

Warning
• Engine compartment is a dangerous
area. Improper operation may cause
injuries or deaths.
• Read and follow the relevant warn- OMA28-0033
ings before operating the batteries.
- To shut off the engine, turn the igni-
tion switch or start switch to "LOCK " or
"OFF".
- Connect one end (-1) of the red cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the disabled
battery (A) and connect the other end (-2)
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery (B).
- Connect one end (-3) of the black cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster
battery (B) and connect the other end
(-4) to the engine block or a metal part
securely-connected to the engine block
of the disabled vehicle.

269

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 354 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

Note Warning • Do not connect the negative cable


to the fuel system component or
brake pipe. During operation, do
Place the jumper cables in position to pre- A battery can explode if you do not follow not face the battery. Beware of acid
vent them from touching the moving parts the correct procedure, seriously injuring burns.
of the engine. anyone nearby.
• Engine compartment is a dangerous
- Start the engine on the booster vehicle area. Improper operation may cause
and let it idle, and then start the engine injuries or deaths.
on the disabled vehicle until the engine
runs smoothly. • Read and follow the relevant warn-
ings before operating the batteries.
• Make sure the voltage of the booster
Warning battery is equal to that of the dis-
abled battery, and the capacity of
• Do not remove the jumper cables the booster battery is similar to that
until the headlamps have been of the disabled battery. Otherwise, it
turned off. may cause explosion.
• Turn on the air blower and rear • Keep open flames away from the
windshield heater in the vehicle with battery.
the depleted battery to reduce the • Do not connect the negative cable
voltage peak resulting from remov- to the negative terminal of the dis-
ing the cables. abled battery. Make sure there is no
• Once your vehicle is running, dis- static near the battery. Otherwise,
connect the negative cable from combustible gas produced by the
your vehicle, then from the booster battery can be ignited by sparks,
battery. Disconnect the positive causing explosion.
cable from your vehicle, then the
booster battery.

270

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 355 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

6.8 Emergency towing Detailed steps are shown below: If you finish the towing, remove the towing ring
in the reverse order of installation, and place
- Take the towing ring and wheel nut the cover plate in position.
Front drag wrench out of the tool kit case in the
trunk.
- Pry the cover plate by using screwdriver Note
and hang it on the car.
• Make sure the towing ring is in the
- Screw the towing ring into the thread vehicle.
hole on the right of front bumper in arrow
direction and tighten it. • The driver in the towed vehicle must
turn on the hazard warning lights
- Insert the demounting wrench for wheel and follow the local laws and regu-
bolts into the towing ring until it reaches lations.
to limit position. • Turn ignition switch to "START" po-
sition and release steering gear. Ro-
tate steering wheel back and forth
Warning to inspect whether steering lock is
separated.
OMA28-0151 • Unless you have the experience, do • Shift the transmission in Neutral
not tow other vehicle to avoid acci- (manual). Shift the transmission in
dents. N (automatic).
Screw the front towing ring into the thread hole • Make sure the towing ring is se-
on the right of front bumper. You can see this • Be sure to strain the tow rope.
cured in the threaded hole firmly.
thread hole when you pry the cover plate of Failure to do so can cause the tow-
front bumper. Use the demounting wrench for ing ring comes off the threaded
wheel bolts or other suitable tools to tighten the hole.
towing ring.

271

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 356 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

Rear towing Detailed steps are shown below: If you finish the towing, remove the towing ring
in the reverse order of installation, and place
- Take the towing ring and wheel nut wrench the cover plate in position.
out of the tool kit case in the trunk.
- Pry the cover plate by using screwdriver
and hang it on the car. Note
- Screw the towing ring into the thread • Make sure the towing ring is in the
hole on the rear of front bumper in arrow vehicle.
direction and tighten it.
• The driver in the towed vehicle must
- Insert the demounting wrench for wheel turn on the hazard warning lights
bolts into the towing ring until it reaches and follow the local laws and regu-
to limit position. lations.
• Start the vehicle gradually until the
tow rope strains, and then acceler-
Warning ate gradually.
OMA28-0152
• To start the vehicle, engage the
• Unless you have the experience, do clutch gently and gradually (manual
Screw the rear towing ring into the thread hole not tow other vehicle to avoid acci- transmission), and press the ac-
on the right of rear bumper. You can see this dents. celerator pedal gradually (automatic
thread hole when you pry the cover plate of • Make sure the towing ring is se- transmission)
front bumper. Use the socket wrench for wheel cured in the threaded hole firmly.
bolts or other suitable tools to tighten the tow- • Remember that both the brake
Failure to do so can cause the tow- booster and the steering booster
ing ring. ing ring comes off the threaded of the towed vehicle are disabled!
hole. Normally, press the brake pedal in
advance and press it slightly fre-
quently.

272

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 357 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

Towing requirements when an ac- Towing


cident occurs Note
If your car has an accident and requires to be
• Since the transmission oil pump towed, we suggest using platform truck to tow
The vehicle can only be towed with the drive
does not work when the engine is your car. If the is not available, you can also
wheels off ground in the event of transmission
stopped, the transmission is in poor use wheeled truck to tow your car if necessary.
leakage.
lubrication conditions when the ve-
- Move the shift lever into N. hicle being towed at high speed and Select proper towing method according to con-
for a long distance, resulting in the figuration and fault condition of your car. But
- Do not tow your vehicle at a speed more transmission damage. Therefore, the following precautions must be notified:
than 50 km/h. make sure the front wheels are off • Please contact GAC Trumpchi service
- Maximum towing distance of 5 Km. ground if your vehicle is to be towed station or professional towing company
for a long distance. to tow your car. If you are not sure that
- When your vehicle needs to be towed • If your vehicle is towed by raising you can do well, please don't towing
by a tractor truck, make sure its front its rear, the wheels will rotate back- your car at random; otherwise, your car
wheels are off ground. ward, so that the gears in the trans- is easy to be damaged.
mission will move at high revolving
speed, causing damage to the trans- • All towing methods require the use of
mission in a short time. safety chain system and comply with rel-
evant traffic law.
• You must tow your car according to the
specification; otherwise it may cause the
damage of your car and traffic accident.

273

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 358 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

Tow car with a platform truck Tow car from the front by using wheeled truck

Note
• For cars equipped with electronic
parking brake (EPB), when tow-
ing them, towing platform must be
placed under the rear wheel. Oth-
erwise, the brake and tire may be
damaged.
• When lifting the wheel, pay attention
to make sure that the other end op-
posite to lifting end (rear of the car)
has proper leaving-off ground clear-
OMA28-0160 OMA28-0161
ance. Otherwise, the housing of rear
bumper or body bottom plate of the
car to be towed may be damaged
This towing method is applicable to all models If your vehicle’s rear wheels and rear axle are during towing.
of fault cars. We suggest using this method as damaged, the flat-bed needs to be placed be-
much as possible. neath your vehicle’s rear wheels.
If there is no damage to your vehicle’s rear
Note wheels and rear axle, your vehicle does not
need to be transported by flat-bed. But, the
parking brake lever needs to be released fully.
Pay attention to exert parking brake and
fix four wheels, to prevent vehicle from
moving during emergent braking when
tow the car.

274

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 359 2016/7/11 16:05:26


6. Accident Handling

Tow the car from the rear by using wheeled Lifting truck is strictly forbidden to use.
truck

Note
Do not let your vehicle be towed with the
front wheels on ground fast or far. Do-
ing so can cause serious damage to the
transmission.

OMA28-0162
OMA28-0163

Don't use lifting truck to tow the car from the


If your vehicle’s front wheels and front axle are front or rear of the car; otherwise, it may cause
damaged, the flat-bed needs to be placed be- damage to the body.
neath your vehicle’s front wheels.
If there is no damage to your vehicle’s front
wheels and front axle, your vehicle does not
need to be transported by flat-bed. But it should
be towed at low speed with its parking brake
lever fully released, its shift lever in Neutral and
its steering wheel locked straight.

275

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 360 2016/7/11 16:05:26


7. Type approval information

7.1 Type approval number S/N Name of Type Type approval number

15 GAC6450A1F5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820074
S/N Name of Type Type approval number
16 GAC6450A1D5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820075
1 GAC6450A2A5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820043
Note: when referring to type approval information, please follow corre-
2 GAC6450A2C5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820044 sponding serial number.

3 GAC6450A1A5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820045

4 GAC6450A1A5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820046

5 GAC6450A1C5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820047

6 GAC6450A2A5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820048

7 GAC6450A2C5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820049

8 GAC6450A1C5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820050

9 GAC6450A1D5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820068

10 GAC6450A2D5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820069

11 GAC6450A2F5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820070

12 GAC6450A2F5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820071

13 GAC6450A2D5 CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820072

14 GAC6450A1F5A CN QQ G5 Z2 0B820073

276

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 361 2016/7/11 16:05:26


7. Type approval information

7.2 Type approval information


Name of Type
Type approval information 1 2 3 4
GAC6450A2A5A GAC6450A2C5 GAC6450A1A5 GAC6450A1A5A
Engine Model /Manufacturer 4A13M1/GAC MOTOR Co., Ltd.
Front:1388615X/front: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Catalytic converter model /manufac- Carrier : front: unit 1: (Suzhou) Green Ceramic Co., Ltd.
turer Coating: front: unit 1: Wuxi Weifu Environmental Protection Catalyzer Co., Ltd.
Closing: frent: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Fuel evaporative control device 2140003AAF00/Zhejiang Hengbo Air Filter Co., Ltd.
model /Manufacturer
Oxygen sensor model /Manufacturer Front: LSF4; Rear: LSF4/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Crankcase emission control device/ 10090081310000/Elringklinger Automobile Parts (China) Co., Ltd or 10090081310000/Ningbo Shentong
Manufacturer Moulding Co., Ltd.
EGR model / manufacturer /
OBD model / manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
IUPR / NOX monitoring Yes/Yes
ECU Model /Manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Transmission model /Number of gear Manual /5 Auto/7 Manual /5 Manual /5
positions
Muffler model /Manufacturer Front muffler: 17530-W0010; rear muffler::17510-W0010/Guangzhou Sanwu Automobile Parts Co., Ltd.
Turbocharger Model /Manufacturer RHF3/Wuxi IHI Turbo Co., Ltd. (WIT)
Intercooler Type Vacant

277

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 362 2016/7/11 16:05:27


7. Type approval information

Name of Type
Type approval information 5 6 7 8
GAC6450A1C5A GAC6450A2A5 GAC6450A2C5A GAC6450A1C5
Engine Model /Manufacturer 4A13M1/GAC MOTOR Co., Ltd.
Front:1388615X/front: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Catalytic converter model /manufac- Carrier : front: unit 1: (Suzhou) Green Ceramic Co., Ltd.
turer Coating: front: unit 1: Wuxi Weifu Environmental Protection Catalyzer Co., Ltd.
Closing: frent: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Fuel evaporative control device 2140003AAF00/Zhejiang Hengbo Air Filter Co., Ltd.
model /Manufacturer
Oxygen sensor model /Manufacturer Front: LSF4; Rear: LSF4/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Crankcase emission control device/ 10090081310000/Elringklinger Automobile Parts (China) Co., Ltd or 10090081310000/Ningbo Shentong
Manufacturer Moulding Co., Ltd.
EGR model / manufacturer
OBD model / manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
IUPR / NOX monitoring Yes/Yes
ECU Model /Manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Transmission model /Number of gear Auto/7 Manual /5 Auto/7 Auto/7
positions
Muffler model /Manufacturer Front muffler: 17530-W0010; rear muffler::17510-W0010/Guangzhou Sanwu Automobile Parts Co., Ltd.
Turbocharger Model /Manufacturer RHF3/Wuxi IHI Turbo Co., Ltd. (WIT)
Intercooler Type Vacant

278

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 363 2016/7/11 16:05:27


7. Type approval information

Name of Type
Type approval information 9 10 11 12
GAC6450A1D5 GAC6450A2D5A GAC6450A2F5A GAC6450A2F5
Engine Model /Manufacturer 4A15M1/GAC MOTOR Co., Ltd.
Front:1388615X/front: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Catalytic converter model /manufac- Carrier : front: unit 1: (Suzhou) Green Ceramic Co., Ltd.
turer Coating: front: unit 1: Wuxi Weifu Environmental Protection Catalyzer Co., Ltd.
Closing: frent: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Fuel evaporative control device 2140003AAF00/Zhejiang Hengbo Air Filter Co., Ltd.
model /Manufacturer
Oxygen sensor model /Manufacturer Front: LSF4; Rear: LSF4/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Crankcase emission control device/ 10090081310000/Elringklinger Automobile Parts (China) Co., Ltd or 10090081310000/Ningbo Shentong
Manufacturer Moulding Co., Ltd.
EGR model / manufacturer
OBD model / manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
IUPR / NOX monitoring Yes/Yes
ECU Model /Manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Transmission model /Number of gear Manual /5 Manual /5 Auto/7 Auto/7
positions
Fore silencer: 17530-W0010; back silencer: 17510-W0010/Guangzhou Sanwu Auto Parts Co., Ltd. or fore
Muffler model /Manufacturer silencer: 1903206X; back silencer: 1903326X/Faurecia (Guangzhou) Auto Parts Co., Ltd. Sanshui Branch
Company.
Turbocharger Model /Manufacturer RHF3/Wuxi IHI Turbo Co., Ltd. (WIT)
Intercooler Type Vacant

279

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 364 2016/7/11 16:05:27


7. Type approval information

Name of Type
Type approval information 13 14 15 16
GAC6450A2D5 GAC6450A1F5A GAC6450A1F5 GAC6450A1D5A
Engine Model /Manufacturer 4A15M1/GAC MOTOR Co., Ltd.
Front:1388615X/front: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Catalytic converter model /manufac- Carrier : front: unit 1: (Suzhou) Green Ceramic Co., Ltd.
turer Coating: front: unit 1: Wuxi Weifu Environmental Protection Catalyzer Co., Ltd.
Closing: frent: Faurecia (Guangzhou) Automobile Parts System Co., Ltd. - Sanshui branch company
Fuel evaporative control device 2140003AAF00/Zhejiang Hengbo Air Filter Co., Ltd.
model /Manufacturer
Oxygen sensor model /Manufacturer Front: LSF4; Rear: LSF4/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Crankcase emission control device/ 10090081310000/Elringklinger Automobile Parts (China) Co., Ltd or 10090081310000/Ningbo Shentong
Manufacturer Moulding Co., Ltd.
EGR model / manufacturer
OBD model / manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
IUPR / NOX monitoring Yes/Yes
ECU Model /Manufacturer ME7/United Auto Electronic System Co., Ltd.
Transmission model /Number of gear Manual /5 Auto/7 Auto/7 Manual /5
positions
Fore silencer: 17530-W0010; back silencer: 17510-W0010/Guangzhou Sanwu Auto Parts Co., Ltd. or fore
Muffler model /Manufacturer silencer: 1903206X; back silencer: 1903326X/Faurecia (Guangzhou) Auto Parts Co., Ltd. Sanshui Branch
Company.
Turbocharger Model /Manufacturer RHF3/Wuxi IHI Turbo Co., Ltd. (WIT)
Intercooler Type Vacant

280

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 365 2016/7/11 16:05:27


This manual describes relevant information related to configurations, functions, performance parameters and product schematic drawings of full
Trumpchi series cars. Its contents are effective when printing is allowed. But actual car configurations and functions are subject to actually delivered
cars. If there is any difference between the product schematic drawing and actual car, the actual one should prevail.
If there is any modification in contents of this manual, change of technical specifications, and supplements or termination, we have right not to notify.
All copyright reserved by GAC. Without written permission by GAC, no printing and extracting of all or part contents of this manual is allowed.

A28 V5_2016-04-11.indd 366 2016/7/11 16:05:27

You might also like